Page 1 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 ■ETHERNET CONNECTION ■ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION ■DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU ■CNC CONNECTION ■SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION ■LASER DISPLACEMENT ■BUS CONNECTION SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION ■MELSECNET/H CONNECTION, ■GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION ■MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION...
Page 3: Safety Precautions
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT). Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
Page 4 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. • GT27, GT25, GT23 The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), the display section dims, and inputs by a touch switch are disabled.
Page 5 • GT27,GT25,GT23 When a GOT2000 series model and a GOT1000 series model are on an Ethernet network, do not set the IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GOTs and the controllers on this network. Doing so can cause IP address duplication at the GOT startup, adversely affecting the communication of the device with the IP address 192.168.0.18.
Page 6 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction. Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto/from the GOT.
Page 7 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING When closing the USB environmental protection cover, note the following points to ensure the IP rating. • GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V) Push the [PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. •...
Page 8 Use a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. • GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P For the usable screwdrivers, refer to the following. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. • GT27, GT25, GT23 Specified torque range (0.5 N•m to 0.8 N•m)
Page 9 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault. (GT27, GT25 Only) [TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS] WARNING Before testing the operation of a user-created monitor screen (such as turning on or off a bit device,...
Page 10 Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction. Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion. Dispose of used battery promptly.
Page 11 [PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE] WARNING If the SD card is removed from drive A of the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the GOT may stop processing data for about 20 seconds. The GOT cannot be operated during this period. The functions that run in the background including a screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and others are also interrupted.
Page 12 [PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE] CAUTION When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out. Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break. When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly.
Page 13 When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (Refer to the GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU member states.)
Page 14: Table Of Contents
1.6.3Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) ......1 - 46 1.6.4Check on GX Developer ......................... 1 - 49 1.6.5Check on GX Works2 ........................1 - 52 1.6.6Check on the PLC ........................... 1 - 52 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS A - 12...
Page 15 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D (GT27, GT25 only) ............... 2 - 13 2.2MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D (GT21 only) ................2 - 33 2.3MELSEC iQ-F ............................2 - 39 2.4MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 ..................2 - 55 2.5MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6 * ......................
Page 16 5.1.1PLC/Motion controller CPU ....................... 5 - 2 5.1.2Ethernet module..........................5 - 8 5.2System Configuration..........................5 - 9 5.2.1Connection to Ethernet module ......................5 - 9 5.2.2Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module ..........5 - 13 5.2.3Connecting to Display I/F ........................ 5 - 16 5.2.4Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ..........
Page 17 6.5PLC Side Setting........................... 6 - 54 6.5.1L6ADP-R4 adapter settings ......................6 - 54 6.5.2GX Works2 settings ........................6 - 55 6.6Precautions ............................6 - 56 7. SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 7.1Connectable Model List .......................... 7 - 2 7.1.1PLC/Motion controller CPU....................... 7 - 2 7.1.2Serial communication module/Computer link module...............
Page 18 8.4.5Powering OFF or resetting the PLC ....................8 - 41 8.4.6Position of the GOT ........................8 - 41 8.4.7When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver written ... 8 - 41 8.4.8When designing the system ......................8 - 41 8.4.9When assigning GOT I/O signals....................
Page 19 10.4.2Connecting to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) ............10 - 20 10.4.3Connecting to MELSEC-Q/L series .................... 10 - 26 10.5Precautions ............................10 - 37 11. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1Connectable Model List ........................11 - 2 11.1.1PLC/Motion controller CPU......................11 - 2 11.1.2CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit................
Page 20 13.5.5Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) ........13 - 25 13.5.6[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ................... 13 - 27 13.6Precautions ............................13 - 28 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 14. INVERTER CONNECTION 14.1Connectable Model List........................14 - 2 14.2System Configuration..........................
Page 21 15.2.4Connecting to the MELSERVO-JE Series .................. 15 - 12 15.3Connection Diagram ......................... 15 - 14 15.3.1RS-232 cable ..........................15 - 14 15.3.2RS-422 cable ..........................15 - 15 15.4GOT Side Settings ..........................15 - 19 15.4.1When directly connecting the GOT to a servo amplifier.............. 15 - 19 15.4.2When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a motion controller or simple motion module ..........................
Page 22 17.5CNC Side Settings ..........................17 - 16 17.5.1MELSECNET/10 connection....................... 17 - 16 17.5.2CC-Link(ID) connection to MELDAS C6/C64................17 - 19 17.5.3CC-Link(ID) connection to M700VS/M70V series ............... 17 - 22 17.5.4Ethernet connection ........................17 - 22 17.6Device Range that Can Be Set ......................17 - 24 17.7Precautions ............................
Page 23 20.3Connection Diagram ........................... 20 - 8 20.3.1RS-232 cable ..........................20 - 8 20.3.2RS-422 cable ..........................20 - 10 20.4GOT Side Settings ..........................20 - 13 20.4.1Setting communication interface (Controller Setting)..............20 - 13 20.4.2Communication detail settings ....................20 - 16 20.5Precautions ............................
Page 24 22.7.2Accessing by CW Configurator ....................22 - 83 22.7.3Accessing the PLC by the PX Developer, GX Configurator............22 - 85 22.7.4Accessing by GX Works2 ......................22 - 92 22.7.5Accessing by GX LogViewer..................... 22 - 115 22.7.6Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP ................... 22 - 116 22.7.7Accessing by the MT Developer ....................
Page 25: List Of Manuals For Gt Works3
POINT POINT POINT e-Manual e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: • Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. • Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual.
Page 26: Abbreviations, Generic Terms, Meanings Of Icons
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, Meanings of Icons The following shows the abbreviations, generic terms, and meanings of icons used in this manual. ■1. GOT (1) GOT2000 series Meaning of icon Abbreviations and generic terms Description Support support GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA, GT2715-XTBD...
Page 27 Meaning of icon Abbreviations and generic terms Description Support support GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Handy GOT GT2506HS-VTBD (2) GOT1000 series, GOT900 series, and GOT800 series Meaning of icon Abbreviations and generic terms Description Support support GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series GOT800 Series...
Page 28 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design software GT Designer3 for GOT2000/GOT1000 series GT Designer3 Screen design software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3 GT Designer3 (GOT2000) GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Screen design software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3...
Page 29 (2) Software related to iQ Works Abbreviations and generic terms Description Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ iQ Works Works Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ MELSOFT Navigator Works) (□...
Page 30 Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc. CLPA CC-Link Partner Association GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc. HMS Industrial Networks LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd. ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA SICK SICK AG SIEMENS...
Page 31 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting the Communication Interface ..... 1 - 3 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT....1 - 20 Option Devices for the Respective Connection.
Page 32: Preparatory Procedures For Monitoring
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections. Step 1. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and perform the communication setting. ➠...
Page 33: Setting The Communication Interface
Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment. When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT. Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 34: Setting Connected Equipment (Channel Setting)
Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. ➠ Mitsubishi Electric Products 19. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 1 - 4 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface...
Page 35 ■2. Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F. When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*]. Item Description Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4. Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
Page 36 (2) Setting [Controller Type] The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, refer to the following. Type Model name R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R16MTCPU R32MTCPU R64MTCPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU ...
Page 37 Type Model name Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q04UDPVCPU Q06UDPVCPU Q13UDPVCPU Q26UDPVCPU Q12DCCPU-V Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Q24DHCCPU-LS MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 Q26DHCCPU-LS Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU...
Page 38 Type Model name Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QS001CPU MELSERVO-J4-*B MELSERVO-JE-*B Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6* Q2ASCPU-S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1 MELDAS C6 (FCA C6) MELDAS C64 (FCA C64) L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT...
Page 39 Type Model name A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU MELSEC-A A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 1 - 9 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface...
Page 40 Type Model name A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU A273UCPU MELSEC-A A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 FX0S FX0N FX2C FX1S FX1N MELSEC-FX FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3GE...
Page 41 Type Model name MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J4-*A MELSERVO-J4-*A MELSERVO-JE-*A MELSERVO-JE-*A MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ MELSERVO-JE-*A MELSERVO-JE-*A FREQROL-S500 FREQROL-S500E FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-F500 FREQROL-F500L FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-A500 FREQROL-A500L FREQROL-V500 FREQROL-V500L FREQROL 500/700/800 Series, SENSORLESS SERVO FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-F700 FREQROL-F700P FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-A800...
Page 42 (3) Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT. Extension interface 3rd stage Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT) Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT) 2nd stage...
Page 43: Got Ethernet Setting
1.1.2 GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by using the following network. 1) GOT IP Address Setting Set the following communication port setting.  Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Set [GOT IP Address] and [Subnet Mask] in the standard port with a bult-in GOT, or port 1. ...
Page 44 (2) [Extended Port], or [Port 2] The following shows an example for [Extended Port]. Step 1. Select [System] → [GOT Setup] → [GOT Ethernet Setting] → [GOT IP Address Setting] → [Extended Port] from the menu. Step 2. Set the followings. Item Description Range...
Page 45 (3) [Wireless LAN] Step 1. Select [System] → [GOT Setup] → [GOT Ethernet Setting] → [GOT IP Address Setting] → [Wireless LAN] from the menu. Step 2. Set the followings. Item Description Range Update GOT wireless LAN I/F setting The wireless LAN interface settings are applied on GOT. Enable wireless LAN I/F Enable the wireless LAN.
Page 46 ■2. GOT Ethernet Common Setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extension port, or port 1 and port 2. Step 1. Select [System] → [GOT Setup] → [GOT Ethernet Setting] → [GOT Ethernet Base Setting] from the menu. Step 2.
Page 47: I/F Communication Setting
1.1.3 I/F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used. ■1. Setting Step 1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu. Step 2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears.
Page 48 ■2. Setting item The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting. For the detailed explanations, refer to the following manual. ➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual When the GT21 series is selected in the GOT type setting Item Description Set channel No.
Page 49: Precautions
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. ➠ Mitsubishi Electric Products 19. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION (2) Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
Page 50: Writing The Package Data Onto The Got
Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Write the package data onto the GOT. For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following help. ➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual 1.2.1 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Step 1.
Page 51: Checking The Package Data Writing On Got
1.2.2 Checking the package data writing on GOT Confirm if the package data is properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3. For reading from the GOT, refer to the following help. ➠ GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Step 1.
Page 52: Option Devices For The Respective Connection
Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type. For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual. 1.3.1 Communication module Product name Model Specifications For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)
Page 53: Option Unit
How to incorporate the communication module to the field network adapter unit, and the details of the product name of the communication module, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series Field Network Adapter Unit User's Manual 1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter Product name...
Page 54: Installing A Unit On Another Unit (Checking The Unit Installation Position)
For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) ■1. When using a bus connection unit The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used.
Page 55 ■2. When using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface. If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used.
Page 56 ■4. When using a field network adapter unit A field network adapter unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface. However, at the top of the field network adapter unit, you will not be able to mount the each communication unit. Example: Installing a field network adapter unit Field network Field network...
Page 57 ■6. When using the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit Only either one of the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit can be installed to the GOT.
Page 58: Connection Cables For The Respective Connection
Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary. For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side.
Page 59 ■2. RS-422/485 interface Use the following as the RS-422/485 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector. (1) Connector model Connector type Connector model Manufacturer...
Page 60: Coaxial Cableconnector Connection Method
1.4.2 Coaxial cableconnector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable. CAUTION  Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions. Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable External conductor Outer sheath...
Page 61 Step 5. Insert the connector assembly shown in ### into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell. Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact. • Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section. •...
Page 62: Terminating Resistors Of Got
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following. ■1. RS-422/485 communication unit Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Switch No.
Page 63 ■2. GT27 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Switch No. Terminating resistor 100 OHM Disable The default setting is "Disable". • For GT2710-V Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover) 1 - 33 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection...
Page 64 ■3. GT25 (Except GT2505-V) Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Switch No. Terminating resistor 100 OHM Disable The default setting is "Disable". • For GT2510-V Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover) ■4. GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. Terminating resistor selector switch 1 - 34 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection...
Page 65 ■5. GT23 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Switch No. Terminating resistor 100 OHM Disable The default setting is "Disable". • For GT2310-V Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover) ■6. GT21 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. •...
Page 66: Setting The Rs-232/485 Signal Conversion Adaptor
1.1.3 I/F communication setting When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch ■1. Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch Switch No.
Page 67: Verifying Got Recognizes Connected Equipment
• Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status • Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Step 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [GOT basic set] [Controller] from the Utility.
Page 68 For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (3) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data.
Page 69: Checking For Normal Monitoring
Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Error code Communication Channel No. Error message...
Page 70 • Display the I/O check screen by [Maintenance] [I/O check]. For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual: ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Step 1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen. Touching [CPU] executes the communication check with the connected PLC.
Page 71 Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor]. For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual: ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (Operation of communication monitoring function screen) Main Menu Comm. Setting Touch [Comm.
Page 72 For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Controller Network can be confirmed by the utility screen of the GOT.
Page 73 For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (4) For CC-Link system The communication status between the GOT and the CC-Link System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT.
Page 74: Confirming The Communication State On The Got Side (For Ethernet Connection)
1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) ■1. Confirming the communication state on Windows, GT Designer3 (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.18 Reply from 192.168.3.18: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 When abnormal communication...
Page 75 [PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) 1 - 45 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring...
Page 76: Confirming The Communication State To Each Station (Station Monitoring Function)
1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT. When detecting the abnormal state, it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register (GS). ■1.
Page 77 ■2. Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set. (0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered. (1) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3 Station number...
Page 78 • With other than Ethernet connection: 0 to 127 Device Station number GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 GS288 GS308 GS328...
Page 79: Check On Gx Developer
1.6.4 Check on GX Developer ■1. Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 80 ■2. Checking the wiring state (For optical loop system only) Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. ➠ Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (1) Check the [Receive direction error station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer [Diagnostics]...
Page 81 (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system Use [CC IE Control diagnostics…] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. ➠ CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Check the [Select station network device status display] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8) Startup procedure: GX Developer...
Page 82: Check On Gx Works2
1.6.5 Check on GX Works2 ■1. For CC-Link IE Controller Network system Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 83 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET ....2 - 1 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING ....3 - 1 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM .
Page 85: Device Range That Can Be Set
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D (GT27, GT25 only) . . . 2 - 13 MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D (GT21 only) ... . 2 - 33 MELSEC iQ-F.
Page 86 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi Electric PLCs are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
Page 87 ■1. Setting item (For MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700) When selecting buffer memory (G) with the following controllers MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT MELSEC iQ-F MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 MELSEC-L MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6 * When selecting a servo amplifier device for the following controllers MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT MELSEC iQ-F MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 MELSEC-L...
Page 88 Item Description This item can be set only when The following devices are selected. • Servo amplifier request (SP) • Operation mode selection (OM) • Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) • One-touch tuning (OTI) • Basic parameter (PA) • Gain filter parameter (PB) •...
Page 89 (1) Setting of the CPU No. When monitoring a single CPU system Set to 0. When monitoring a multiple CPU system Set the CPU No. (0 to 4) in [CPU No.] when monitoring a multiple CPU system. When [CPU No.] is set to "0", the monitoring target differs depending on the connection method. Connection method Monitoring target •...
Page 90 (For device BM and CPU No. 1 to 4) Device number Head I/O number of buffer memory Device name CPU No. 1 to 4 (For device G and CPU No. 0) Device number Device name Unit No. PLC station num NW No.
Page 91 POINT POINT POINT (1) [Data Type] and [Format] settings when specifying a virtual servo amplifier device In the object setting or other settings, [Data Type] and [Format] must be set according to the notation in which the corresponding servo amplifier data is represented. For the notation in which the servo amplifier data is represented, refer to the following.
Page 92 (4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX) Set the item for monitoring or writing only the specified bits of the buffer memory. POINT POINT POINT Mask type The mask type is effective when using for the buffer memories divided per 4 bits, such as an analog input block.
Page 93 Mask type 2 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b4 to b7 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0002H when monitoring BM0=4321H as mask type 2. Monitor value BM0=0010H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 2. Input value (Before writing) (After writing)
Page 94 • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b11 and b28 to 31 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00070003H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 3. Monitor value BM0=05000100H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 3. Input value (Before writing) (After writing)
Page 95 Mask type 5 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and write only b0 to b7 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 0021H when monitoring BM0=4321H as mask type 5. Monitor value BM0=0021H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=0000H as mask type 5. Input value (Before writing) (After writing)
Page 96 • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b15 and b24 to 31 of the buffer memory. Example: The monitor value is 00870043H when monitoring BM0=87654321H as mask type 6. Monitor value BM0=65002100H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 6. Input value (Before writing) (After writing)
Page 97: Melsec Iq-R, Rnmt/Nc/Rt, Cr800-D (Gt27, Gt25 Only)
MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D (GT27, GT25 only) The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC] as the controller type. Device No. Device name Setting range representation Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal number Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF M0 to M161882111 Internal relay (M) Latch relay (L)
Page 98 Device No. Device name Setting range representation SB0 to SB9A61FFF Link special relay (SB) Remote input (RX) RX0 to RX3FFF Remote output (RY) RY0 to RY3FFF Link relay (LB) LB0 to LB7FFF SAX0 to SAX2FFF Safety input relay (SAX) Hexadecimal number SAY0 to SAY2FFF Safety output relay (SAY) Bit device...
Page 99 Device No. Device name Setting range representation U3E000000 to U3E012287 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E0) U3E100000 to U3E112287 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E1) U3E200000 to U3E212287 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E2) U3E300000 to U3E312287 Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory (U3E3) SATN0 to SATN35487 Safety timer (current value) (SATN)
Page 100 Device No. Device name Setting range representation CPU buffer memory access device (U3E2G) U3E2G0 to U3E2G268435455 CPU buffer memory access device (U3E3G) U3E3G0 to U3E3G268435455 Decimal number Refresh data register (RD) RD0 to RD1048575 SAW0 to SAW9BFF Safety link register (SAW) Word device Link register (JnW) JnW0 to JnW1FFFF...
Page 101 The following shows the precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO and TMD devices. ■1. Bit device Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Momentary], [Set], and [Reset] for bit switch actions. ■2. Word device and double-word device Only writing is possible.
Page 102 • Basic setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PA1, PA1001 **STY Operation mode PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option **REG PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1 PA5, PA1005 For manufacturer setting PA6, PA1006 *CMX Electronic gear numerator PA7, PA1007 *CDV...
Page 103 • Gain filter parameter Device name Item Symbol PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (adaptive filter II) FILT Vibration suppression control tuning mode PB2, PB1002 VRFT (advanced vibration suppression control II) PB3, PB1003 TFBGN Torque feedback loop gain PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting Load to motor inertia ratio/load to motor mass...
Page 104 Device name Item Symbol PB48, PB1048 Machine resonance suppression filter 4 PB49, PB1049 Notch form selection 4 NHQ4 PB50, PB1050 Machine resonance suppression filter 5 PB51, PB1051 Notch form selection 5 NHQ5 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration PB52, PB1052 VRF21 frequency Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance...
Page 105 • Extension setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PC1, PC1001 Error excessive alarm level PC2, PC1002 Electromagnetic brake sequence output PC3, PC1003 *ENRS Encoder output pulse selection PC4, PC1004 Function selection C-1 **COP1 PC5, PC1005 Function selection C-2 **COP2 PC6, PC1006 Function selection C-3 *COP3 PC7, PC1007...
Page 106 • I/O setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PD1, PD1001 *DIA1 Input signal automatic on selection 1 PD2, PD1002 *DIA2 Input signal automatic on selection 2 PD3, PD1003 *DI1 Input device selection 1 PD4, PD1004 *DI2 Input device selection 2 PD5, PD1005 *DI3 Input device selection 3...
Page 107 • Positioning control parameter (R-J4-□GF(-RJ) only) Device name Item Symbol PT1, PT1001 Command mode selection *CTY PT2, PT1002 For manufacturer setting PT3, PT1003 Feeding function selection *FTY PT3, PT1004 For manufacturer setting PT5, PT1005 Home position return speed PT6, PT1006 Creep speed PT7, PT1007 Home position shift distance...
Page 108 Device name Item Symbol PT65, PT1065 Jog speed command PT66, PT1066 For manufacturer setting PT67, PT1067 Speed limit VLMT PT68, PT1068 For manufacturer setting Home position shift distance (extension PT69, PT1069 ZSTH parameter) PT70, PT1070 For manufacturer setting Travel distance after proximity dog (extension PT71, PT1071 DCTH parameter)
Page 109 • Extension setting No.3 parameter Device name Item Symbol PF1, PF1001 For manufacturer setting PF2, PF1002 *FOP2 Function selection F-2 PF3 to PF5, PF1003 to PF1005 For manufacturer setting PF6, PF1006 Function selection F-5 *FOP5 PF7 to PF11, PF1007 to PF1011 For manufacturer setting PF12, PF1012 Electronic dynamic brake operating time...
Page 110 • Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter Device name Item Symbol Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection PL1, PL1001 **LIT1 PL2, PL1002 Linear encoder resolution - Numerator **LIM PL3, PL1003 Linear encoder resolution - Denominator **LID Linear servo motor/DD motor function selection PL4, PL1004 *LIT2 PL5, PL1005...
Page 111 • Status display Device name Item Symbol Cumulative feedback pulses Servo motor speed Droop pulses Cumulative command pulses Command pulse frequency ST5 to ST6 For manufacturer setting Regenerative load ratio Effective load ratio Peak load ratio ST10 Instantaneous torque ST11 Position within one-revolution ST12 ABS counter...
Page 112 • Alarm (compatible with MELSERVO-J4-*A) Device name Item Symbol ALM0 Current alarm number ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms Servo status(alarm) Cumulative feedback ALM11 pulses ALM12 Servo status(alarm) Servo motor speed ALM13 Servo status(alarm) Droop pulses Servo status(alarm) cumulative command ALM14 pulses ALM15...
Page 113 Device name Item Symbol ALM53 Servo status(alarm) Position actual value ALM54 Servo status(alarm) Command position Servo status(alarm) Command remaining ALM55 distance ALM56 Servo status(alarm) Point table No. ALM57 to ALM59 For manufacturer setting Alarm number from Alarm History most recent ALM200 alarm Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in...
Page 114 Device name Item Symbol Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th ALM229 alarm in past Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th ALM230 alarm in past Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th ALM231 alarm in past Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 12th ALM232 alarm in past Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th...
Page 115 Device name Item Symbol Point table (dwell) DWL1 to DWL255, DWL1001 to DWL1255 No. 1 to No. 255 Point table (auxiliary function) AUX1 to AUX255, AUX1001 to AUX1255 No. 1 to No. 255 • Machine diagnosis data Device name Item Symbol Machine diagnosis data parameter number Machine diagnosis data shift judgment (test...
Page 116 • One-touch tuning data Device name Item Symbol OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation OTS1 Error code list OTS2 Setting time OTS3 Overshoot amount • External input Device name Item Symbol Input device statuses 1 Input device statuses 2 Input device statuses 3 External input pin statuses Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 1...
Page 117: Melsec Iq-R, Rnmt/Rt, Cr800-D (Gt21 Only)
MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D (GT21 only) The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC] as the controller type. Device No. Device name Setting range representation Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal number Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF M0 to M161882111 Internal relay (M) Latch relay (L)
Page 118 Device No. Device name Setting range representation SB0 to SB9A61FFF Link special relay (SB) Remote input (RX) RX0 to RX3FFF Remote output (RY) RY0 to RY3FFF Link relay (LB) LB0 to LB7FFF SAX0 to SAX2FFF Safety input relay (SAX) Hexadecimal number SAY0 to SAY2FFF Safety output relay (SAY) Bit device...
Page 119 Device No. Device name Setting range representation File register (R) R0 to R32767 Block 0 to 255 Extension file register (ER) Device ER0 to ER32767 ZR0 to ZR10027007 Extension file register (ZR) Index register (16 bits) (Z) Z0 to Z23 Buffer memory G0 to G268435455 (Intelligent function module) (G)
Page 120 Device No. Device name Setting range representation *2*3*5 OTS0 to OTS3 One-touch tuning data (OTS) *2*3 DI0 to DI6 External input (DI) *2*3*5 DO0 to DO4 External output (DO) Motion device (#) #0 to #108287 Decimal number CPU buffer memory access device (U3E0G) U3E0G0 to U3E0G268435455 CPU buffer memory access device (U3E1G) U3E1G0 to U3E1G268435455...
Page 121 The bit device status depends on the SFC program status (active or inactive). When the SFC program is inactive, the bit device is off (stores 0). If a step relay (S) is used in the random read processing, specify the relevant step relay (block) (BLS) on GT SoftGOT2000 or GT Simulator3.
Page 122 The following shows the precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO and TMD devices. ■1. Bit device Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Momentary], [Set], and [Reset] for bit switch actions. ■2. Word device and double-word device Only writing is possible.
Page 123: Melsec Iq-F
MELSEC iQ-F The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC iQ-F] as the controller type. Device No. Device name Setting range representation Input (X) X0 to X1777 Octal Output (Y) Y0 to Y1777 M0 to M32767 Internal relay (M) Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal...
Page 124 Device No. Device name Setting range representation Data register (D) D0 to D7999 Decimal Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD11999 Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN1023 Counter (current value)(CN) CN0 to CN1023 Decimal Retentive timer (current value) (SN) SN0 to SN1023...
Page 125 • PB, PC, PE: 1 to 64 • PD, PF, PL: 1 to 48 Use the following devices to write data to the E2PROM of a servo amplifier. • PA: 1001 to 1032 • PB, PC, PE: 1001 to 1064 •...
Page 126 The following shows the precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO and TMD devices. ■1. Bit device Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Momentary], [Set], and [Reset] for bit switch actions. ■2. Word device and double-word device Only writing is possible.
Page 127 • Basic setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PA1, PA1001 Operation mode **STY PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option **REG PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1 PA5 to PA7, PA1005 to PA1007 For manufacturer setting PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode PA9, PA1009...
Page 128 • Gain filter parameter Device name Item Symbol PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (adaptive filter II) FILT Vibration suppression control tuning mode PB2, PB1002 VRFT (advanced vibration suppression control II) PB3, PB1003 Torque feedback loop gain TFBGN PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting Load to motor inertia ratio/load to motor mass...
Page 129 Device name Item Symbol PB48, PB1048 Machine resonance suppression filter 4 PB49, PB1049 Notch form selection 4 NHQ4 PB50, PB1050 Machine resonance suppression filter 5 PB51, PB1051 Notch form selection 5 NHQ5 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration PB52, PB1052 VRF21 frequency Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance...
Page 130 • Extension setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PC1, PC1001 Error excessive alarm level PC2, PC1002 Electromagnetic brake sequence output PC3, PC1003 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS PC4, PC1004 Function selection C-1 **COP1 PC5, PC1005 Function selection C-2 **COP2 PC6, PC1006 Function selection C-3 *COP3 PC7, PC1007...
Page 131 • I/O setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PD1, PD1001 For manufacturer setting PD2, PD1002 Input signal automatic on selection 2 *DIA2 PD3 to PD6, For manufacturer setting PD1003 to PD1006 PD7, PD1007 Output device selection 1 *DO1 PD8, PD1008 Output device selection 2 *DO2 PD9, PD1009...
Page 132 • Extension setting No.2 parameter Device name Item Symbol PE1, PE1001 Fully closed loop function selection 1 **FCT1 PE2, PE1002 For manufacturer setting PE3, PE1003 Fully closed loop function selection 2 *FCT2 Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse PE4, PE1004 **FBN electronic gear 1 - Numerator Fully closed loop control - Feedback pulse...
Page 133 • Extension setting No.3 parameter Device name Item Symbol PF1, PF1001 For manufacturer setting PF2, PF1002 Function selection F-2 *FOP2 PF3 to PF5, PF1003 to PF1005 For manufacturer setting PF6, PF1006 Function selection F-5 *FOP5 PF7 to PF11, PF1007 to PF1011 For manufacturer setting PF12, PF1012 Electronic dynamic brake operating time...
Page 134 • Status display Device name Item Symbol Cumulative feedback pulses Servo motor speed Droop pulses Cumulative command pulses Command pulse frequency ST5 to ST6 For manufacturer setting Regenerative load ratio Effective load ratio Peak load ratio ST10 Instantaneous torque ST11 Position within one-revolution ST12 ABS counter...
Page 135 Device name Item Symbol ALM20 Servo status(alarm) peak load ratio ALM21 Servo status(alarm) Instantaneous torque Servo status(alarm) Within one-revolution ALM22 position(1 pulse unit) ALM23 Servo status(alarm) ABS counter ALM24 Servo status(alarm) load inertia moment ratio ALM25 Servo status(alarm) Bus voltage Servo status(alarm) Load-side cumulative ALM26 feedback pulses...
Page 136 Device name Item Symbol Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in ALM209 past Alarm number from Alarm History 10th alarm in ALM210 past Alarm number from Alarm History 11th alarm in ALM211 past Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm in ALM212 past Alarm number from Alarm History 13th alarm in...
Page 137 Device name Item Symbol Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in ALM246 past Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in ALM247 past Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in ALM248 past Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in ALM249 past Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in...
Page 138 • One-touch tuning data Device name Item Symbol OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation OTS1 Error code list OTS2 Setting time OTS3 Overshoot amount • External input Device name Item Symbol Input device statuses 1 Input device statuses 2 Input device statuses 3 External input pin statuses Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 1...
Page 139: Melsec-Q/Qs, Q17Nd/M/Nc/Dr, Crnd-700
MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC-Q/QS, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700] as the controller type. Device No. *8*10*11 Setting range Device name representation Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF *4*6 M0 to M61439 Internal relay (M) Decimal Latch relay (L)
Page 140 Device No. *8*10*11 Setting range Device name representation Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory U3E010000 to U3E024335 (U3E0) Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory U3E110000 to U3E124335 (U3E1) Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory U3E210000 to U3E224335 (U3E2) Multiple CPU high speed transmission memory U3E310000 to U3E324335 (U3E3) #0 to #12287...
Page 141 Device No. *8*10*11 Setting range Device name representation *5*12*18 ALD0 to ALD1 Lifetime diagnosis (ALD) *5*13*18 TMI0 to TMI2 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) (TMI) Double word Decimal *5*13*18 TMO0 device Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) (TMO) TMD0 to TMD1 *5*13*18 Set data (for test operation) (TMD)
Page 142: Melsec-Qna, Meldas C6 *
MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6 * The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-QnA/, MELDAS C6*] as the controller type are as follows. Device No. *6*7*10 Setting range Device name representation Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF M0 to M32767 Internal relay (M) Decimal...
Page 143: Melsec-L
MELSEC-L The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-L] as the controller type are as follows. Device No. Device name Setting range representation Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF *4*6 M0 to M61439 Internal relay (M) Decimal Latch relay (L)
Page 144 Device No. Device name Setting range representation *1*2 R0 to R32767 File register (R) *1*3*4 ZR0 to ZR393215 Extension file register (ZR) Index register (Z) Z0 to Z19 Buffer memory G0 to G65535 (Intelligent function module) (G) PA1 to PA32 *5*11*13 Basic parameter (PA) PA1001 to PA1032...
Page 145 Device No. Device name Setting range representation *5*13 ALD0 to ALD1 Lifetime diagnosis (ALD) *5*13 TMI0 to TMI2 Input signal for test operation (for test operation) (TMI) Double word Decimal *5*13 TMO0 device Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) (TMO) TMD0 to TMD1 *5*13 Set data (for test operation) (TMD)
Page 146 The following shows the precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO and TMD devices. ■1. Bit device Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Momentary], [Set], and [Reset] for bit switch actions. ■2. Word device and double-word device Only writing is possible.
Page 147: Melsec-A
MELSEC-A The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-A] as the controller type are as follows. ■1. For GT27 Device name Setting range Device No. representation Input (X) X0 to X1FFF Hexadecimal Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF Internal relay/Special internal relay (M) M0 to M32767 Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767...
Page 148 ■2. For GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION Device name Setting range Device No. representation Input (X) X0 to X1FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF Internal relay/ M0 to M9255 Decimal Special internal relay (M) Latch relay (L) L0 to L8191 Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047 Bit device Link relay (B)
Page 149: Melsec-Fx
MELSEC-FX The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-FX] as the controller type are as follows. Device No. Device name Setting range representation Input relay (X) X0 to X377 Octal Output relay (Y) Y0 to Y377 Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M7679 Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8511...
Page 150 POINT POINT POINT (1) Precautions when using the buffer memory • When the power supply of the special block or special module is turned off, the contents of the buffer memory are initialized, except for some keeping areas. • When the buffer memory is monitored by the GOT, the PLC scan time may increase instantly.
Page 151: Melsec-Ws
MELSEC-WS The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-WS] as the controller type are as follows. Device No. Device Setting range representation Input (I) I1.1 to I12.8 Output (Q) Q1.1 to Q12.8 Decimal +Decimal Bit device Logic result (LQ) LQ0.0 to LQ3.7 Logic input (LI) LI0.0 to LI3.7...
Page 152 (3) Engineering software for MELSEC-WS and device representation of GT Designer3 The engineering software for MELSEC-WS and the device representation of GT Designer3 are different. Set the device by referring to the following table. Device GT Designer3 Engineering software for MELSEC-WS : I/O model name (such as XTIO) (1-12(Dec)): Module number (1-12(Dec)): Module number...
Page 153 (4) When using offset specification When setting devices using the offset function, the device values are as follows. (a) Input(I) Offset +8 to +15 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8 I3.1 I3.2 I3.3...
Page 154 (e) EFI input(EI) Offset +8 to +15 EI110 EI111 EI112 EI113 EI120 EI121 EI122 EI123 EI130 EI131 EI132 EI133 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 +240 +256 EI210 EI211 EI212 EI213 +272 EI220 EI221 EI222 EI223 +288 EI230 EI231 EI232 EI233 Device range error +302...
Page 155: Access Range For Monitoring
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems ........... . 3 - 2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection .
Page 156: Access Range For Monitoring Stations On Network Systems
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, CC- Link IE Field Network ■1. Bus connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. Control station Normal Normal...
Page 157 (2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the network. Control station Normal Normal station station Normal station • The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on other networks. (For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the routing parameter) When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-Link IE controller network.
Page 158 (3) When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU • The GOT can monitor the control station on the network. When the PLC CPU on the control station is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU, the GOT cannot monitor devices other than B and W assigned for the network parameter. Control station Normal...
Page 159 (6) When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ- 700) via direct CPU connection Monitor the motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following QCPUs in the multiple CPU system. Controller Relay CPU Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU...
Page 160 • If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) are monitored, monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored. ➠ ■7. Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection POINT...
Page 161 ■7. Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 1: When using bus connection Control station Control station (1-1) (2-1) (1-4) Network No.1 Network No.2 (1-2) (2-4) (2-2) (1-3) (2-3) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No.
Page 162 Example 2: When using bus connection Control station Control station (1-1) (2-1) Network No.1 Network No.2 (2-4) (1-3) (2-2) (2-3) (1-2) Data link system (L1) (L2) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No.
Page 163 (2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station No.). Station to be accessed Station connected Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system to GOT QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2)
Page 164 Example 3: When using CPU direct connection or serial communication connection Control station Control station (1-1) (2-1) Q(Q mode) (1-4) Network No.1 Network No.2 (1-2) (2-4) (2-2) (1-3) (2-3) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No.
Page 165 Example 4: When using CPU direct connection or serial communication connection Control station Control station Q(Q mode) (1-1) (2-1) Network No.1 Network No.2 (2-4) (1-3) (2-2) (2-3) (1-2) Data link system (L1) (L2) • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No.
Page 166 POINT POINT POINT Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced. Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection Q (Q mode) (1-1)
Page 167 Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) Image of CC-Link Connection Network module CC-Link Master Q(Q mode ) (1-2) module (0 station) (1-2) CC-Link System A nA (1-3) (1-1) Network System (1-4) Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Q (Q mode) (1-1)
Page 168: Access Range For Monitoring When Using Ethernet Connection
Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection ■1. Access range (1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC The PLC can be monitored via the Ethernet module set in the Ethernet setting on GT Designer3. The GOT can access CPUs on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link field network via the RCPU, R Motion (Ver.03 or later), QCPU or QnACPU (When monitoring other...
Page 169: Cc-Link System Access Range For Monitoring
CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring ■1. When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/serial communication connection Only connected stations can be monitored. ■2. When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (1) Access range The master station and local station can be monitored. : Can be monitored, : Cannot be monitored Monitor target...
Page 170 (3) Setting NW No. and station number When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter setting NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local When monitoring PLC CPU devices of another station NW No.
Page 171: Data Link System (Melsecnet/B, (Ii)) Access Range For Monitoring
Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring ■1. Bus connection, CPU direct connection, Computer link connection (1) When connecting to the master station • Local stations can be monitored. When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
Page 172: Access Range For Monitoring When Connecting Fxcpu
■3. Setting method of monitor device The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices . (1) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter Specify the host station.
Page 173: Connection To Remote I/O Station In Melsecnet/H Network System
Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station. When connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 174: Direct Cpu Connection
■1. Direct CPU connection • The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 175 ■3. Ethernet connection • Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on the remote I/O station. For details of cables and others required for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 176: Connection To The Head Module Of Cc-Link Ie Field Network System
Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to the head module, use the following connection methods. ■1.
Page 177: How To Monitor Reduntant System
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSEC iQ-R Series ........4 - 2 MELSEC Q Series .
Page 178: Melsec Iq-R Series
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM MELSEC iQ-R Series This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the RCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT. The GOT monitors the control system PLC CPU. Ethernet (RCPU redundant system) Standby system...
Page 179: Connection To Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu
➠ 4.1.5 Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network ➠ 4.1.6 Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station) ➠ 4.1.7 When connecting via the serial communication unit 4.1.1 Connection to built-in Ethernet port CPU ■1. One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained.
Page 180 Standby system (system B) PLC setting (GX Works3) • Redundant Setting Item Set value System B IP Address 192.168.3.2 Control system IP address availability Not Use POINT POINT POINT [Control system IP address availability] setting Set [Control system IP address availability] to [Not use] (default). If set to [Use], the GOT will not follow the system switching.
Page 181 ■2. 1:n connection with redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. (Pair No.1) Control system (system A) Standby system (system B) 1) 2) 4) N/W No.: 1(virtual) N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1 IP address: 192.168.3.2 Port No.: 5006...
Page 182 (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC Host Host (The control system is monitored.) NW No.: 1 Other Station No.: Station number of the control system The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can Device setting (Network setting) be speified.
Page 183 ■3. For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. (Redundant system-1: Pair No.1) Control system (system A) 1) 2) 4) Standby system (system B) N/W No.: 1(virtual) N/W No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 1(virtual) PC No.: 2(virtual) IP address: 192.168.3.1...
Page 184 (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC Host Host (The control system is monitored.) NW No.: 1 Other Station No.: Station number of the control system The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can Device setting (Network setting) Control be speified.
Page 185: Connection To Ethernet Module
4.1.2 Connection to Ethernet module ■1. One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.3.18 Port No.: 5001 Ethernet (Redundant system: Pair No.1) Standby system (system B) 2) 5) 2) 5)
Page 186 Standby system (system B) PLC setting (GX Works3) • Redundant Setting Item Set value System B IP Address 192.168.3.2 Control system IP address availability B system module operation mode Online mode Control system IP address availability Not Use POINT POINT POINT [Control system IP address availability] setting Set [Control system IP address availability] to [Not use] (default).
Page 187 ■2. 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. (Redundant system-1: Pair No.1) Control system (system A) 1) 2) 5) Standby system (system B) N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 N/W No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.3.1 PC No.: 2...
Page 188 (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC Host Host (The control system is monitored.) NW No.: 1 Other Station No.: Station number of the control system The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can Device setting (Network setting) be speified.
Page 189 ■3. For mixed connection of redundant system and Non-redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. (Redundant system-1: Pair No.1) Control system (system A) 1) 2) 5) Standby system (system B) N/W No.: 1 N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.3.1...
Page 190 (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC Host Host (The control system is monitored.) NW No.: 1 Other Station No.: Station number of the control system The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can Device setting (Network setting) be speified.
Page 191: Connection To Cc-Link Ie Controller Network
4.1.3 Connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network ■1. One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 Optical cable (Redundant system: Pair No.1) Control system (system A) Standby system (system B) 2) 5) 2) 5)
Page 192 Control system (system A) PLC setting • Redundant Setting Item Set value B system module operation mode Online mode (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC Host NW No.: 1 Other Station No.: Station number of the control system...
Page 193 ■2. 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. (Redundant system-1: Pair No.1) Control system 1) 2) 5) Standby system (system A) (system B) N/W No.: 1 N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 PC No.: 1 N/W No.: 1...
Page 194 (5) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system • Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 2) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. •...
Page 195: Connection To Cc-Link Ie Field Network
4.1.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network ■1. One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 Ethernet cable (Redundant system: Pair No.1) 2) 5) 2) 5) Standby system Control system...
Page 196 • Network range setting Item Set value Sub master station No. Control system (system A) PLC setting • Redundant Setting Item Set value B system module operation mode Online mode (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type...
Page 197 ■2. 1:n connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. (Redundant system-1: Pair No.1) Standby system Control system 1) 2) 5) (system B) (system A) N/W No.:1 N/W No.:1 PC No.:1 PC No.:0 N/W No.:1 PC No.:4...
Page 198 (5) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system • Redundant system-1 When the system switching occurs, CPU (PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. The GOT automatically starts monitoring accroding to the specified system. •...
Page 199: Connection To Remote I/O Station In Cc-Link Ie Field Network
4.1.5 Connection to Remote I/O Station in CC-Link IE Field Network ■1. Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) (1) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section.
Page 200 (3) PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)).
Page 201  [Network Configuration Settings] Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows. 5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). At [Redundant System Settings] , set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online]. CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2] for [Type].
Page 202 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example). 3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. Network No.: 1 Station No.: 2 4) Setting of Ethernet module...
Page 203  When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows. IP Address: 192.168.0.1 Network No.: 2 Station No.: 1...
Page 204 ■2. Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) (1) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section. N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 2 IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5001...
Page 205 (3) PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)).
Page 206  [Network Configuration Settings] Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows. 5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(MR)). At [Redundant System Settings] , set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online]. CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(SR)] for [Type].
Page 207 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. • The second RJ72GF15-T2(SR) • Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example). 3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(SR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows.
Page 208  When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number separately Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Not Use IP Address], and set the the IP address, network number, and station number separately. (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows.
Page 209 ■3. Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) (1) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Ethernet is explained in this section. N/W No.: 2 PC No.: 2 IP Address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5001...
Page 210 (3) PLC Side Setting (GX Works3) Redundant CPU (Master station) 1) [Operation mode] Set to [Redundant]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the redundant function module (R6RFM) and the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)).
Page 211 4) [Module Parameter]-[Basic Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)).  [Network Topology] Set [Network Topology] to [Ring].  [Network Configuration Settings] Set [Network Configuration Settings] as follows. 5) [Module Parameter]-[Application Settings] Set [Module Parameter] of the CC-Link IE field network module (RJ71GF11-T2(LR)). At [Redundant System Settings], set [Module Operation Mode] of standby system (system B) to [Online].
Page 212 CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (1st) 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(LR)] for [Type]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. • RJ72GF15-T2(LR) • Ethernet module (RJ71EN71 (E+E) in the following example). 3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(LR).
Page 213 4) Setting of Ethernet module Set the IP address, Network No., and station number to the port communicating with the GOT in the Ethernet module.  When setting the IP address, Network No., and station number in a batch Set [Communications by Network No./Station No.] to [Enable] and [Setting Method] to [Use IP Address] so that the third octet of IP address is the network number and the fourth octet is the station number.
Page 214 CC-Link IE Field Network Remote Head Module (2nd) 1) [Type] Select [RJ72GF15-T2(LR)] for [Type]. 2) [I/O Assignment] Set [I/O Assignment] in [System parameter]. At [I/O Assignment], assign the following. • RJ72GF15-T2(LR)) 3) [CPU Parameter] Set the network number and station number of RJ72GF15-T2(LR). (1) In the system configuration example, the values are as follows.
Page 215 (4) GOT Side Settings ➠ ■1. Ethernet module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) (5) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, CPU (Network No.: 1, PLC station No.: 1) takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system.
Page 216 ■4. Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single configuration) (1) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section. RS232 Remote I/O station Remote I/O station...
Page 217 (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC Host Network No. 1 Other Station No.: Station number of the control system The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can Device setting (Network setting) be speified.
Page 218 ■5. Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Single-line configuration) (1) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section. RS232 Remote I/O station 1st Remote I/O station 2nd...
Page 219 ■6. Serial communication module (mounted on remote I/O station) connection (Double-line configuration) (1) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section. RS232 Remote I/O station 1st Remote I/O station 2nd...
Page 220: Connection To Cc-Link (Intelligent Device Station)
4.1.6 Connection to CC-Link (intelligent device station) ■1. One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection configuration examples are explained. N/W No.:0 PC No.:2 (Redundant system: Pair No.1) CC-Link cable Standby system Control system (system A) (system B) 2) 5) 2) 5)
Page 221 Control system (system B) PLC setting • Module parameter Item Set value Station type Standby master station Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Station No. Transmission speed Auto-tracking Parameter setting Parameter (fixed) (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model...
Page 222: When Connecting Via The Serial Communication Unit
4.1.7 When connecting via the serial communication unit ■1. One-to-one connection of GOT and redundant system (1) System configuration example The following connection example for connecting to the redundant CPU via the remote I/O station connected by Serial communication module is explained in this section. RS232 N/W No.:1 Single RCPU...
Page 223 (4) GOT Side Settings Set GT Designer3 as follows. Setting item Contents of setting Model Controller Type MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC Host Network No. 1 Other Station No.: Station number of the control system The system (control system/standby system) of the the monitor target can Device setting (Network setting) be speified.
Page 224: Precautions
4.1.8 Precautions ■1. System switching (1) When system is switched by user program • The communication path does not change, and the GOT follows the monitor. • The system alarm is not displayed. (2) When system switches because of a dislocated cable, etc. •...
Page 225: Melsec Q Series
MELSEC Q Series This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT. Monitor target Station No. 0 Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Standby Control system...
Page 226 The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system. • Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) ➠ ■1.Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) •...
Page 227 The following table shows the features of each connection method. Connection type Before system switching After system switching • Direct CPU connection Standby system Control system (Remote I/O station of Control system Standby system MELSECNET/H Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote master station network system) sub master station Multiplexed remote...
Page 228 Connection type Before system switching After system switching Intelligent device station GOT1 CC-Link GOT1 AJ65BT-G4-S3 • CC-Link connection GOT2 (intelligent device CC-Link Master station Standby master station GOT2 station) • CC-Link connection Master station Standby master station Control Standby (Via G4) system system Standby...
Page 229 Connection type Before system switching After system switching • Serial communication connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) • Ethernet connection Control system Standby system Control system (Ethernet module Station Station Station Station mounted on the No.
Page 230: Connection To Remote I/O Station In Melsecnet/H Network System
4.2.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System ■1. Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/ H network system.
Page 231 ■2. Serial communication connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station) This section explains the serial communication connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Page 232 ■3. Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the MELESCNET/H network system.
Page 233: Direct Cpu Connection
4.2.2 Direct CPU Connection This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system. Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GOTs, are available. ■1. When using one GOT CPU direct connection Network No.
Page 234 ■2. When using two GOTs Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching. CPU direct connection CPU direct connection GOT2 GOT1 Monitor Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Network No. 1, Station No. 1 target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station) Control system...
Page 235 ■3. Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system without making MELSEC redundant setting • As the GOT monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be changed in response to the system switching of the redundant system.
Page 236 The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration example: when using one GOT Standby Control Station Q25PRH QJ71 Q25PRH QJ71 Station system system No. 1 BR11 BR11 No. 0 (System B) (System A) QJ72 Station BR15 No.
Page 237 Step 1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device. (Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Trigger Action operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function) Step 2.
Page 238 Step 3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit). Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).
Page 239 Step 4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON). Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function.
Page 240: Cc-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)
4.2.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. CC-Link connection Network No.
Page 241 ■3. Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system (1) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
Page 242: Cc-Link Connection (Via G4)
4.2.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. Network No.
Page 243 ■3. Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system (1) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
Page 244: Melsecnet/H And Melsecnet/10 Connections (Network Systems)
4.2.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network system. Network No.
Page 245: Cc-Link Ie Controller Network Connection (Network System)
4.2.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the CC-Link IE controller network. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Network No.
Page 246: Ethernet Connection
4.2.7 Ethernet Connection This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network. Network No. 1, Station No. 3 Network No. 1, Station No.
Page 247: Connection To The Redundant Type Extension Base Unit
4.2.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit ■1. Serial communication connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
Page 248 ■2. Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
Page 249 ■3. CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connection for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
Page 250 ■4. CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connection (Via G4) for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit via the AJ65BT-G4-S3. The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
Page 251: Switch The Monitor Target To The Control System Using The Script Function
4.2.9 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function The following explains how to create a script screen, to be used for the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 connection (network system), or Ethernet connection, that automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.) at the occurrence of system switching even if the MELSEC redundant setting is not made.
Page 252 Step 1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the trigger action may be disabled.
Page 253 Step 3. Create a monitor screen. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system. Step 4. Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to validate the station number changing function.
Page 254 POINT POINT POINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the control station.
Page 255 Step 2. Set the trigger action. Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [trigger action] turns ON. (For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, set "258"(0102H)) Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No.
Page 256 Step 4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the station No. 1 to the station number switching device. After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0". For Ethernet connection, the monitor becomes abnormal when the station number switching device value is "0".
Page 257 Step 6. Change the station number switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value.
Page 258 ■2. Method for using the screen changing function • As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number. When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the other monitor screen.
Page 259 Step 2. Set the trigger action. Set the trigger action so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [trigger action]. Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No.
Page 260 Step 3. Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common) • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). • Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 2 (1-2). Step 4.
Page 261 (2) Setting method (Ethernet connection) System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection Ethernet Network No. 1 Station No. 3 Standby system Q25PRH QJ71 Q25PRH QJ71 Control system (System B) (System A) Station No. 1 Station No. 2 Connected module Network No. Station No.
Page 262 Step 4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value.
Page 263: Precautions
4.2.10 Precautions ■1. System switching (1) When system is switched by user program • The communication path does not change, and the GOT follows the monitor. • The system alarm is not displayed. (2) When system switches because of a dislocated cable, etc. •...
Page 264 ■6. Connection to the remote I/O station (1) Monitor function The GOT can monitor only the following GOT functions. • Monitor function • System monitor function (2) Clock setting of the GOT The GOT does not allow the PLC CPU clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility. The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made.
Page 265: Melsec Redundant Setting
MELSEC Redundant Setting The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT when monitoring a RCPU redundant system, QCPU redundant system. POINT POINT POINT Before making the MELSEC redundant setting In the MELSEC redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs. Step 1.
Page 266 *1 Pair number Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair. Example: Ethernet connection in the RCPU redundant system (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2) (Pair No.1) Control system (system A) Standby system (system B)
Page 267: Ethernet Connection
5. ETHERNET CONNECTION Connectable Model List ....... . 5 - 2 System Configuration .
Page 268: Connectable Model List
5. ETHERNET CONNECTION Connectable Model List 5.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU ➠ MELSEC iQ-R 5.2.1 Ethernet Series ➠...
Page 269 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU ➠ Ethernet 5.2.1 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) ➠ Ethernet 5.2.1 Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
Page 270 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type ➠ MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Ethernet 5.2.1 L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT ➠ L02CPU-P 5.2.2 MELSEC-L Ethernet L06CPU-P ➠ 5.2.1 L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q ➠ Ethernet Q02HCPU-A 5.2.1 (A mode) Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA...
Page 271 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A ➠ A2SCPU Ethernet 5.2.1 (AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 ➠ Ethernet 5.2.1 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU...
Page 272 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion A171SCPU-S3 controller ➠ Ethernet 5.2.1 A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3 MELSECNET/ QJ72LP25-25 ➠ QJ72LP25G Ethernet 5.2.1 Remote I/O station...
Page 273 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type FX0S FX0N FX2C FX1S FX1N FX2N MELSEC-FX FX1NC FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC ➠ Ethernet 5.2.1 FX3GE FX3U FX3UC The supported version of the main units varies depending on the Ethernet module to be used as shown below. Ethernet module FX3U(C) FX3G(C)
Page 274: Ethernet Module
5.1.2 Ethernet module CPU series Ethernet module MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71EN71 CNC C80 (R16NCCPU-S1) CR800-R(R16RTCPU) MELSEC-Q (Q mode) MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71 CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QE71N-T...
Page 275: System Configuration
■1. When connecting to MELSEC iQ-R Series, motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series), C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), MELSEC-Q, QS, QnA, A or motion controller CPU (R Series) Communication driver Ethernet PLC CPU module Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway Connection cable Connection cable Maximum Number of segment connectable...
Page 276 Connection cable Maximum Number of segment connectable Communication *3*4 Model name Cable model Model Ethernet module Option device equipment length type AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2 - (Built into GOT) AJ71QE71N-T AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 MELSEC-QnA Ethernet A1SJ71QE71N3-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T GT25-J71E71-100 A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2 •...
Page 277 ■2. When connecting to MELSEC-FX Communication driver Ethernet PLC CPU module Ethernet (FX), Gateway Connection cable Connection cable Maximum Number of segment connectable Communication *3*4 Model name Cable model Model Ethernet module Option device equipment length type - (Built into GOT) MELSEC-FX FX3U-ENET-L Ethernet...
Page 278 Connection cable Maximum Number of segment connectable Communication *3*4 Model name Cable model Model Ethernet module Option device equipment length type - (Built into GOT) MELSEC-FX Ethernet 100m FX3U-ENET-ADP (FX3GC) • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair GT25-J71E71-100 cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher 4 GOTs...
Page 279: Connection To Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu Or C Controller Module
5.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module Communication driver Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway Connection cable Maximum Number of *1*2 segment connectable Connection cable Communication Model name Model Option device equipment length type - (Built into GOT)
Page 280 Maximum Number of *1*2 segment connectable Connection cable Communication Model name Model Option device equipment length type • 100BASE-TX - (Built into GOT) Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category 5 or higher *6*7 Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs...
Page 281 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. A straight cable is available.
Page 282: Connecting To Display I/F
5.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F Communication driver PLC CPU C70/C80 Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC, CRnD-700,Gateway Connection cable Maximum Number of segment connectable Connection cable Communication Model name Model Option device equipment length type - (Built into GOT) CNC C70 16 GOTs for 1 Ethernet 100m *3*4...
Page 283: Connection To Cc-Link Ie Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module
5.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module Communication driver Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway CC-Link IE CC-Link IE Field Field Network Network Master/ QCPU Ethernet adapter Local module module Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) CC-Link IE Connection cable Field Network...
Page 284: Connecting To Peripheral I/F (Built-In Ethernet Port Motion Controller Cpu)
5.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) Communication driver Q172DCPU-S1 Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC, Q173DSCPU CRnD-700,Gateway Connection cable Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1 MR-MQ100 Maximum Number of segment connectable Connection cable Communication Model Model name Option device equipment length type Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
Page 285: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • Driver:...
Page 286: Communication Detail Settings
GOT Station 1 to 120 (Default: 18) Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. 1024 to 5010, • For Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway GOT Communication 5014 to 65534 (Default: 5001) (Except for 5011 to 5013 and 49153 to Port No.
Page 287 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 288: Got Ethernet Setting
5.3.3 GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting. ■1. GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. • Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) • Extension port (When using GT25-W, port 2) ■2.
Page 289: Ethernet Setting
5.3.4 Ethernet setting Item Description Range The host is displayed. Host (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)) Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239 Net No. (Default: blank) Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. *4*5*6 1 to 64 or 1 to120 Station...
Page 290 The setting range is as follows: Type Port No. Communication format 5006 UDP (fixed) RCPU, RnCCPU, RnNCCPU, QnD(H)CCPU, LCPU, CR800 5007 TCP (fixed) 5001 UDP (fixed) Q17nNC, RJ71EN71, QJ71E71/ LJ71E71, NZ2GF-ETB 5002 TCP (fixed) 5001 UDP (fixed) QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH 5006 UDP (fixed) 5007 TCP (fixed) AJ71QE71...
Page 291 POINT POINT POINT When selecting [QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH] for [Controller Type] When selecting [QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH] for [Controller Type], the port No. setting can be changed. (1) When [5001] is set for the port No.: There is the setting for the network No. and PC No. of the built-in Ethernet port CPU (Port No.: 5001).
Page 292 (3) Changing the host on the GOT main unit The host can be changed by the utility function of the GOT main unit. For the detailed connection method, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) 5 - 26 5.3 GOT Side Settings...
Page 293: Routing Parameter Setting
5.3.5 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 294: Plc Side Setting
PLC Side Setting Model Reference R04CPU, R08CPU R16CPU, R32CPU R120CPU, R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU R08PCPU, R16PCPU R32PCPU, R120PCPU 5.4.1 Built-in Ethernet port RCPU R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, 5.4.2 R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU, CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1) CR800-R(R16RTCPU) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R R12CCPU-V 5.4.4 series)
Page 295: Connecting To Melsec Iq-R Series Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu (One-To One Connection)
5.4.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R Series built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to one connection) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual.
Page 296 Item Set value (Use default value) Delay Time GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015 Transparent Port No. 5014 Ethernet setting Item Set value Host N/W No.
Page 297 ■2. GOT Side Communication format is TCP (1) System configuration For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port CPU to one GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set [Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT. ...
Page 298 External Device Configuration The setting is required for all the connected GOTs. Item Set value Protocol (Use default value) Open system MELSOFT connection (3) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following.
Page 299 Ethernet setting Item Set value Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Type RCPU IP Address 192.168.3.39 Port No. 5007 Communication TCP (fixed) Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No. In the case of CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1), set to [RnNCCPU].
Page 300: Connecting To Melsec Iq-R Series Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu (Multiple Connection)
5.4.2 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R Series built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 301 Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting Communication Data Code (Use default value) Open Method Setting Target Device Connection Configuration Setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (3) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT...
Page 302 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. In the case of CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1), set to [RnNCCPU]. (4) Checking communication state of Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
Page 303 ■2. GOT Side Communication format is TCP (1) System configuration (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No. :1 PLC No. :1 IP address :192.168.3.18 Port No. :5001 Communication format :TCP (fixed) (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Network No.
Page 304 External Device Configuration The setting is required for all the connected GOTs. Item Set value Protocol (Use default value) Open system MELSOFT connection (3) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following.
Page 305 Ethernet setting Set value Item Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Type RCPU RCPU IP Address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 Port No. 5007 5007 Communication TCP (fixed) TCP (fixed) Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. In the case of CNC C80(R16NCCPU-S1), set to [RnNCCPU].
Page 306: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)
5.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 307 Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Transient Transmission Group No. Online Program Change Permission/Protection Setting (Use default value) Communication Data Code Open Method Setting Target Device Connection Configuration Setting Refer to (2). : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Set the same network No.
Page 308 Item Range Relay station No. 0 to 120 POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. ➠ 5.3.5 Routing parameter setting (4) Communication confirmation The INIT.
Page 309 ■3. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT NET No. GOT PLC No. GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192.168.3.18 GOT Port No. 5002 (Communication) Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time (2) GOT Standard Ethernet Setting...
Page 310 POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠ 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) ■4. Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows.
Page 311: Connection To C Controller Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)
5.4.4 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 312 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Item IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway External Device Configuration : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Set the IP address corresponding to the CH No. to be used to connect to the GOT. ■3.
Page 313 (3) Ethernet setting Set value Item Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Type RnCCPU RnCCPU IP Address 192.168.3.13 192.168.3.4 5006 5006 Port No. Communication Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set.
Page 314: Connecting To Melsec Iq-F Series Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu
5.4.5 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series built-in Ethernet port CPU This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 315 ■2. [Module parameter] of GX Works3 (1) Built-in Ethernet port Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection 192.168.3.250  IP Address (Use default value) Subnet Mask × Default Gateway × Communication Data Code (Use default value)  ➠ Target Device Connection Configuration (2) Target Device connection ○...
Page 316 ■3. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠ 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) (2) Ethernet setting When connecting Built-in Ethernet port CPU to a GOT, the setting items for the network No.
Page 317 ■4. Checking communication state of Built-in Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.250 Reply from 192.168.3.1: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.250 Request timed out.
Page 318: Connecting To Melsec-Q/L Series Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu (One-To-One Connection)
5.4.6 Connecting to MELSEC-Q/L Series built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to- one connection) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the following manual.
Page 319 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Default router IP address × Communication data code  Enable online change (FTP, MC protocol)  (Use default value) Disable direct connection to MELSOFT  Do not respond to search for CPU (Built-in ...
Page 320 GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015 Transparent Port No. 5014 Ethernet setting Item Set value Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH, LCPU IP address...
Page 321 ■2. System configuration (When the PLC side [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use]) Set [Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT. (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No.
Page 322 (2) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠ 5.3.1Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) (2) Ethernet setting When connecting Built-in Ethernet port CPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network No.
Page 323: Connecting To Melsec-Q/L Series Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu (Multiple Connection)
(3) Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. • When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.39: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 •...
Page 324 ■1. System configuration (When the PLC side [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is the default value) (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication : UDP(fixed) format
Page 325 Setting necessity at Item Set value GOT connection ➠ Open settings (b) Open settings. FTP settings (Use default value) Time settings : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Open settings The setting is required for all the connected GOTs. Item Set value Protocol...
Page 326 Item Set value (Use default value) Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015 Transparent Port No. 5014 Ethernet setting Set value Item Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH, LCPU QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH, LCPU IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 5006 5006 Port No.
Page 327 ■2. System configuration (When the PLC side [MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting] is [Use]) Set [Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT. (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No.
Page 328 MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting Network No. Station No. (2) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 329: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Q/L Series)
Ethernet setting Set value Item Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Type QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 Port No. 5001 5001 Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed) Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. (3) Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
Page 330 ■1. System configuration (for Q series) (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No. PLC No. IP address : 192.168.3.18 Port No. : 5001 Communication format : UDP (fixed) (The settings other than the following are set to the default) Network No.
Page 331 Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Initial settings Open settings Router relay parameter Station No.<->IP information (Use default value) FTP Parameters E-mail settings Interrupt settings Redundant settings Routing Parameters Refer to (3) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When using Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1), set the start I/O No.
Page 332 (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 333 ■3. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT Net No. GOT Station GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192.168.3.18 GOT Communication Port No. 5002 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time (2) GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Item...
Page 334: Connecting To C Controller Module (Q Series)
(2) When abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again. • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit • Cable connecting condition • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) •...
Page 335 ■2. Utility setting for C Controller module (Q Series) (1) Q12DCCPU-V Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller (Q Series) setting utility. Connection settings Setting necessity at Item Set value GOT connection 192.168.3.3 (Default) Target module Write authority Mark the checkbox target User name...
Page 336 Detail settings Setting necessity at Item Set value GOT connection IP address 192.168.3.1 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway IP address settings CH2 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary System settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Points occupied by empty slot Remote reset Output mode at STOP to RUN...
Page 337 (2) Q24DHCCPU-V/VG/LS Use SW4PVC-CCPU-E for the C Controller (Q Series) setting utility. Connection settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection 192.168.3.39 IP Address (Default) 255.255.255.0 Subnet Mask (Default) Default Gateway : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has been changed, input the changed IP address.
Page 338 (2) GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 Peripheral Communication Port No. 5015 Transparent Port No. 5014 (3) Ethernet setting Set value Item Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Type QnD(H)CCPU...
Page 339: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Qna Series)
5.4.10 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module (QnA Series) For details of the Ethernet module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 340 (1) Operation mode setting switch Operation mode setting Setting necessity at GOT Description Set value switch connection Online (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Exchange condition setting switch Exchange condition setting Setting Setting necessity at GOT Description Set value switch...
Page 341 ■3. [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type Ethernet (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000H Network No. Group No. 0 (fixed) Station No. IP address 192.168.0.19 Station No.<->IP information FTP Parameters (Use default value) Router relay parameter Routing parameters...
Page 342 (2) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 343 ■4. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting GOT Net No. Set value (Use default value) GOT Net No. GOT Station GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192.168.3.18 GOT Communication Port No. 5002 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time (2) GOT Standard Ethernet Setting...
Page 344: Connecting To Ethernet Module (A Series)
5.4.11 Connecting to Ethernet module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (A Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module (A Series) For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 345 (2) Exchange condition setting switch Exchange condition setting Setting Setting necessity at GOT Description Set value switch switch connection Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error Data code setting (binary code) (fixed) (Must not to be used) (fixed) CPU exchange timing setting (Enable write at RUN time) (fixed) Initial timing setting...
Page 346 Buffer memory settings used in the present example Buffer memory address Item Set value Dec (Hex) C0A80313H 0 to 1 (0 to 1H) IP address of Ethernet module (192.168.3.19) 16 (10H) 100H Application setting 24 (18H) Port No. of Ethernet module 5001 25 to 26 IP address of GOT...
Page 347 (2) Example of sequence program * Initial processing IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.3.19) Turned on at first scan only while detection running Initial request Read the initial fault code. Initial WDT ERR fault detection detection COM. ERR turned off request COM.
Page 348 ■4. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT Net No. GOT Station GOT Standard Ethernet Setting 192.168.3.18 GOT Communication Port No. 5002 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time (2) GOT Standard Ethernet Setting Item...
Page 349: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Fx Series)
5.4.12 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module (FX Series) For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 350 Setting Item Setting (with GOT connected) Router relay parameter (Use default value.) E-mail settings :Required :Set if necessary :Not required Set the number of the Ethernet module. (2) Operational settings Setting Item Setting (with GOT connected) (Use default value.) Communication date code IP address 192.168.3.19 Initial timing...
Page 351 (3) Open settings Setting Item Setting (with GOT connected) Protocol Open system MELSOFT connection Fixed buffer Fixed buffer communication procedure Pairing open Existence confirmation (Use default value.) Host station Port No. (DEC.) Transmission target device IP address Transmission target device Port No.
Page 352 ■3. Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET-ADP (1) Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Works2. To set FX3U-ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later is required. For details on the setting of FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 353 POINT POINT POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set. ■4. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Setting (Use default value.) GOT Net No.
Page 354 ■5. Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Reply from 192.168.3.19: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 Request timed out.
Page 355: Connecting To Built-In Ethernet Port Fxcpu (Fx3Ge)
5.4.13 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU (FX3GE) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT FX3GE For details of FX3GE, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 356 Setting Item Setting (with GOT connected) Communication Data Code Disable direct connection to MELSOFT (Use default value.) Do not respond to search for CPU on network :Required :Set if necessary :Not required The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.250. Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 357 (3) Ethernet setting Item Setting Host N/W No. PLC No. Type FX (fixed) Ethernet setting No.1 IP address 192.168.0.19 Port No. 5556 Communication TCP (fixed) Set the value according to the IP address of the connected PLC. Set the value according to the Port No. of the connected PLC. For details, refer to the following.
Page 358: Connecting To Display I/F (Cnc C70)
5.4.14 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display I/F (CNC C70) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Display I/F (CNC C70) For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 359 (2) CNC monitor Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP address 192.168.1.2 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway address 0.0.0.0 Port number 64758 (fixed) Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (3) Communication check The CNC C70 can communicate with the GOT when INIT.LED of the CNC C70 is lit. For confirming the communication state, refer to the following.
Page 360 (3) Ethernet setting Item Set value Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet Type Q17nNC setting No.1 IP address 192.168.1.2 5001 Port No. Communication The following [Port No.] and [Communication format] can also be set. [Port No.]: 5002 [Communication]: TCP POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3...
Page 361: Connecting To Cc-Link Ie Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module
5.4.15 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module This section describes the settings of the GOT, Ethernet adapter module and the PLC in the following system configuration. ■1. System configuration (Use default value for settings other than the following.) Network No.
Page 362 ■2. GX Works2 network parameter Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET For details of the setting contents of PLC side, refer to the following manual. ➠ MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual (1) Network Type, Network No., Total Stations setting Example: Master station setting Set value Item Master station...
Page 363 ■3. Ethernet Adapter Module setting Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter module setting tool. For details of the setting method, refer to the following manual. ➠ CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual (1) CC-Link IE Field Network setting Item Set value Network No.
Page 364 ■4. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠ 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) (1) Controller setting Item Set value (Use default value) GOT Net No.
Page 365: Connecting To Peripheral I/F (Built-In Ethernet Port Motion Controller Cpu)
5.4.16 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT (1) GOT type setting For details, refer to the following.
Page 366 ■2. Basic setting of MT Works2 Use the default values of the basic setting for the system configuration above. (1) Built-in Ethernet port Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection 192.168.3.39 IP address (Default) Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address Communication data code (Use default value) Enable online change...
Page 367 Item Set value Host station port No. ■3. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠ 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) (2) Ethernet setting The settings items for the network No.
Page 368 ■4. Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. When normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time <10ms TTL=32 When abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 Request timed out.
Page 369: Precautions
Precautions ■1. Connection to QnA (S) CPU type Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module (QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type). ■2. Connection to QSCPU The GOT can only read device data and sequence programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
Page 370 ■5. Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs.
Page 371 ■11. When connecting to Built-in Ethernet port of Built-in Ethernet port CPU Connect to GOT after turning on the network equipment such as Built-in Ethernet port CPU or HUB to enable the communication. When the communication with Built-in Ethernet port CPU is not available, a communication error may occur on the GOT.
Page 372 (2) System configuration example 2 In the multiple CPU configuration, the GOT cannot access the CPU module on the other network via the CPU No. (“MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting”: “Use”) and relaying the network module that is controlled by the other CPU No.
Page 373 (3) System configuration example 3 System configuration figure-1 In the system configuration where the Ethernet module is mounted on the same CPU base, when the network Nos. of the CPU built-in Ethernet port and Ethernet module are duplicated, the GOT cannot access the other CPU No.
Page 374 System configuration figure-2 When the network Nos. of the CPU built-in Ethernet port and Ethernet module are duplicated in the following system configuration, the CPU module cannot access to the GOT via the CPU built-in Ethernet port (“MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting”: “Use”) using GT Designer3. The network No.
Page 375: Direct Connection To Cpu
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO Connectable Model List ....... . 6 - 2 System Configuration .
Page 376: Connectable Model List
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communicat Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to ion type R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU RS-232 MELSEC iQ-R Series RS-422 R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU...
Page 377 Communicat Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to ion type Q00JCPU RS-232 Q00CPU RS-422 Q01CPU Q02CPU ➠ 6.2.1 Q02HCPU RS-232 Q06HCPU RS-422 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU RS-232 ➠ 6.2.1 Q12PRHCPU (Main RS-422 base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)
Page 378 Communicat Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to ion type L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT RS-232 L02CPU-P ➠ MELSEC-L 6.2.2 RS-422 L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q RS-232 ➠ Q02HCPU-A 6.2.1 (A mode) RS-422 Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 ➠ RS-422 6.2.3 Q3ACPU MELSEC-QnA...
Page 379 Communicat Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to ion type A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU MELSEC-A ➠ RS-422 6.2.4 (AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 ➠ RS-422 6.2.4 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 RS-422 ➠...
Page 380 Communicat Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to ion type A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion A171SCPU-S3 ➠ controller CPU RS-422 6.2.4 A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 ➠ MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 RS-232 6.2.7 WS0-CPU3 QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H ➠...
Page 381: System Configuration
System Configuration 6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU Communication driver RS-422 connector QCPU conversion cable Serial (MELSEC) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable RS-422 connector Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment conversion cable type distance - (Built into GOT) GT15-RS2-9P GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) RS-232...
Page 382 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. ➠ 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ➠ RS-422 connection diagram 2) For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ➠...
Page 383: Connecting To Lcpu
6.2.2 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver RS-422 connector LCPU Adapter conversion cable Serial (MELSEC) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Option RS-422 connector Communication Max. Model name Adapter Cable model Model equipment conversion cable type distance device - (Built into GOT) GT15-RS2-9P GT01-C30R2-6P(3m)
Page 384 Connection cable Number of connectable Option RS-422 connector Communication Max. Model name Adapter Cable model Model equipment conversion cable type distance device GT15-RS4-9S L02CPU GT10-C02H- L06CPU RS-422 connection L26CPU diagram 3) L26CPU-BT L02SCPU L6ADP- RS-422 1200m L02CPU-P - (Built into L06CPU-P GOT) L26CPU-P...
Page 385 Connection cable Number of connectable Option RS-422 connector Communication Max. Model name Adapter Cable model Model equipment conversion cable type distance device - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) GT10-C02H- L02SCPU FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) 1 GOT for 1 RS-422 L02SCPU-P FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m) GT01-RS4-M GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m)
Page 386: Connecting To Qnacpu
6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU Communication driver QnACPU Serial (MELSEC) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. equipment Model name Cable model Model Option device type distance - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC MELSEC-QnA RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT01-RS4-M GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m)
Page 387: Connecting To Acpu
6.2.4 Connecting to ACPU Communication driver Communication driver ACPU Serial (MELSEC) MELSEC-A Connection cable ( For GT21 and GS) Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. equipment Model name Cable model Model Option device type distance - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
Page 388: Connecting To Melsec Iq-F Series
6.2.5 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series Communication driver FX5U Expansion Expansion FX5UC board adapter Serial (MELSEC) Connection cable ■1. When connecting to FX5U (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of Cable model connectable Model Expansion Expansion Communication Max. Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name...
Page 389 Connection cable Number of Cable model connectable Model Expansion Expansion Communication Max. Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name board adapter type distance number - (Built into GOT) RS-422 connection GT15-RS4-9S diagram 7) 1 GOT for 1 RS-422 PLC built-in port GT10-C02H-9SC RS-422 connection...
Page 390 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. ➠ 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION When the expansion board (communication board) and the expansion adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually. For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.
Page 391 ■2. When connecting to FX5U (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Cable model connectable Model Expansion Expansion Communication Max. Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name board adapter type distance number - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection 1 GOT for 1 diagram 1) FX5-232-BD RS-232...
Page 392 ■3. When connecting to FX5UC (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of Cable model connectable Model Expansion Expansion Communication Max. Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name board adapter type distance number - (Built into GOT) RS-422 connection GT15-RS4-9S diagram 7) 1 GOT for 1 RS-422 PLC built-in...
Page 393 ■4. When connecting to FX5UC (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Cable model connectable Model Expansion Expansion Communication Max. Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name board adapter type distance number - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection 1 GOT for 1 diagram 1) FX5UC FX5-232ADP...
Page 394: Connecting To Fxcpu
6.2.6 Connecting to FXCPU Communication driver Function FX5U Function expansion FX5UC adapter board MELSEC-FX Connection cable ■1. When connecting to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2 or FX2C Connection cable Number of Function connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Cable model Model Option device equipment...
Page 395 Connection cable Number of Function connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Cable model Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) 1 GOT for 1 RS-422 FX2C GT10-C02H-9SC GT01-RS4-M GT10-C30R4-25P(3m) GT10-C100R4-25P(10m) - (Built into GOT) GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
Page 396 ■2. When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of Function connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Cable model Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter *1*3 board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
Page 397 Connection cable Number of Function connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Cable model Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter *1*3 board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC GT01-RS4-M GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) FX1N-422- 1 GOT for 1 GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) FX1S function...
Page 398 ■3. When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Function Cable model connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter *1*3 number board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection...
Page 399 Connection cable Number of Function Cable model connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter *1*3 number board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection diagram 1) FX2NC- RS-232 232ADP GT10-C02H-6PT9P GT01-RS4-M RS-232 connection - (Built into GOT)
Page 400 Connection cable Number of Function Cable model connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter *1*3 number board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection diagram 1) FX2NC RS-232 -232ADP GT10-C02H-6PT9P GT01-RS4-M RS-232 connection - (Built into GOT)
Page 401 ■4. When connecting to FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of connectable Function Function Model Communication Max. Cable model Model Option device equipment name type distance expansion board adapter - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC GT01-RS4-M...
Page 402 Connection cable Number of connectable Function Function Model Communication Max. Cable model Model Option device equipment name type distance expansion board adapter - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC GT01-RS4-M GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) 1 GOT for 1 FX3G GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) function FX3S...
Page 403 ■5. When connecting to FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Function Cable model connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter number board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection 1 GOT for 1 FX3G...
Page 404 Connection cable Number of Function Cable model connectable Function Model Communication Max. expansion Connection diagram Model Option device equipment name type distance adapter number board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection FX3S-CNV-ADP 1 GOT for 1 diagram 1) FX3S FX3U-232ADP RS-232...
Page 405 ■6. When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GC- /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC GT01-RS4-M GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) FX3GC-...
Page 406 ■7. When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GC- /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of connectable Function Communication Cable model Max. Model name Model Option device equipment type Connection diagram number distance adapter - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection FX3U-232ADP diagram 1) 1 GOT for 1...
Page 407 ■8. When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UC- -LT(-2)) (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of connectable Function Function Communication Max. equipment expansion adapter Model name Cable model Model Option device type distance board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
Page 408 Connection cable Number of connectable Function Function Communication Max. equipment expansion adapter Model name Cable model Model Option device type distance board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC GT01-RS4-M GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m) FX3U 1 GOT for 1 GT21-C30R4-8P5(3m) FX3UC FX3U-422-...
Page 409 ■9. When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UC- -LT(-2)) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Function Cable model connectable Function Communication Max. expansion Model name Connection diagram Model Option device equipment type distance adapter number board - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection...
Page 410 ■10. When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- /DSS) (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. equipment Model name Cable model Model Option device type distance - (Built into GOT) GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC GT01-RS4-M GT21-C10R4-8P5(1m)
Page 411 ■11. When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- /DSS) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of connectable Function Communication Cable model Max. Model name Model Option device equipment type Connection diagram number distance adapter - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection FX3UC-...
Page 412: Connecting To Wscpu
6.2.7 Connecting to WSCPU Communication driver WSCPU MELSEC-WS Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Cable model Max. equipment Model name Model Option device type Connection diagram number distance - (Built into GOT) WS0-C20R2(2m) GT15-RS2-9P MELSEC-WS RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT10-C02H-6PT9P WS0-C20R2(2m) 2.3m...
Page 413: Connecting To The Motion Controller Cpu
6.2.8 Connecting to the motion controller CPU Communication driver RS-422 connector Q170MCPU conversion cable Serial (MELSEC) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable RS-422 connector Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment conversion cable type distance - (Built into GOT) GT15-RS2-9P GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) RS-232...
Page 414 Connection cable Number of connectable RS-422 connector Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment conversion cable type distance - (Built into GOT) Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m) GT15-RS4-9S RS-422 connection diagram 9) GT10-C02H-9SC MR-MQ100 RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT01-RS4-M Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m) - (Built into GOT) RS-422 connection...
Page 415: Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 6.3.1 RS-232 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 connection diagram 1) FX PLC side (D-sub 9-pin) GOT side (2) RS-232 connection diagram 2) FX PLC side (D-sub 25-pin) GOT side (3) RS-232 connection diagram 3)
Page 416 (4) RS-232 connection diagram 4) GOT side FX PLC side (terminal block) (D-sub 9-pin) (5) RS-232 connection diagram 5) GOT side FX PLC side (terminal block) (D-sub 25-pin) (6) RS-232 connection diagram 6) GOT side WS0-C20R2(male)side (terminal block) (D-Sub 9-pin) ■2.
Page 417: Rs-422 Cable
6.3.2 RS-422 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS-422 connection diagram 1) GT21 (input power supply : 24V) GOT side Unfastened cable color of (connector GT10-C R4-8P terminal block) Brown Orange Yellow Green Black White GT21 (input power supply : 5V) GOT side Untied wire color of (terminal block)
Page 418 (3) RS-422 connection diagram 3) GOT side PLC side (terminal block) (4) RS-422 connection diagram 4) GOT side PLC side (connector terminal block) (connector terminal block) Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". ➠ 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for .
Page 419 (7) RS-422 connection diagram 7) PLC side GOT side (terminal block) Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to "330 ". (8) RS-422 connection diagram 8) GOT side PLC side (Terminal block) (Terminal block) Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to "330 ".
Page 420 (10) RS-422 connection diagram 10) GOT side (terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-B side The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for . Return connection is not required. (11) RS-422 connection diagram 11) GOT side United wire color of (terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-A Yellow(Dot mark:Black) Yellow(Dot mark:Red)
Page 421: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 422: Communication Detail Settings
POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following: ➠ 1.1.3 I/F communication setting 6.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. ■1. Serial (MELSEC)(GT27, GT25, GT23) Item Description Range...
Page 423 ■2. MELSEC-FX Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. 9600bps, 19200bps, (Default: 115200bps) Transmission Speed 38400bps, 57600bps, When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is 115200bps performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.
Page 424 ■4. Serial (MELSEC) Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with 9600bps, the connected equipment. 19200bps, (Default: 115200bps) Transmission Speed 38400bps, When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is 57600bps, performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected 115200bps...
Page 425 ■6. MELSEC-A(GT21) Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) Transmission Speed 9600bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment.
Page 426 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 427 POINT POINT POINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Disconnect the faulty station For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual.
Page 428: Plc Side Setting
PLC Side Setting When a GOT and an LCPU are connected via an L6ADP-R4 adapter, set the following communication setting. 6.5.1 L6ADP-R4 adapter settings Set the communication settings by the DIP switches of the L6ADP-R4 adapter. L6ADP-R4 DATA 1 PARITY STOP BAUD0 DIP SWITCH...
Page 429: Gx Works2 Settings
6.5.2 GX Works2 settings Set the communication speed in GX Works2. Step 1. Click [PLC parameter] [Adapter Serial Setting]. Step 2. Set [RS-422/485] in [Adapter Type]. Step 3. Set [GOT Connection] in [Select Function]. Step 4. Adjust [Communication Speed Setting] with the GOT communication setting. ➠...
Page 430: Precautions
Precautions ■1. Connection to FXCPU (1) When connecting to FX3 series When the keyword of FXCPU (FX3 series) has been set, GOT may not be able to monitoring.Perform an I/O check again. ➠ ■2. Perform an I/O check When the result of the I/O check is normal, check the status of keyword registration. (2) When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter When a sequence program and settings that the FXCPU communicates with devices other than the GOT are set with software, including GX Developer, the FXCPU cannot communicate with the GOT.
Page 431 ■5. Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No.
Page 432 6 - 58 6.6 Precautions...
Page 433: Serial Communication Connection
7. SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Connectable Model List ....... . 7 - 2 System Configuration .
Page 434: Connectable Model List
7. SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. 7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type R04CPU R08CPU RS-232 ➠ R16CPU 7.2.1 RS-422 R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU RS-232 ➠...
Page 435 Series Model name Clock Communication Connectable model Refer to Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU RS-232 Q02CPU ➠ 7.2.2 RS-422 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU RS-232 ➠ 7.2.2 Q12PHCPU RS-422 Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) RS-232 ➠ 7.2.2 RS-422 Q25PRHCPU...
Page 436 Series Model name Clock Communication Connectable model Refer to *1*2 Q12DCCPU-V C Controller RS-232 Q24DHCCPU-V/VG ➠ module 7.2.2 RS-422 Q24DHCCPU-LS (Q Series) Q26DHCCPU-LS MELSEC-QS QS001CPU L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P RS-232 ➠ MELSEC-L 7.2.3 L06CPU-P RS-422 L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q RS-232...
Page 437 Series Model name Clock Communication Connectable model Refer to A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A RS-232 A2SCPU ➠ 7.2.8 (AnSCPU) RS-422 A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 RS-232 ➠ 7.2.8 RS-422 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 RS-232 ➠...
Page 438 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU. In addition, A0J2-C214-S1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) cannot be used. When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. •...
Page 439 Series Model name Clock Communication Connectable model Refer to A273UCPU A273UHCPU RS-232 ➠ A273UHCPU-S3 7.2.7 RS-422 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 Motion controller CPU A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU RS-232 ➠ A171SHCPUN 7.2.8 RS-422 A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3 QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H RS-232...
Page 440: Serial Communication Module/Computer Link Module
7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module CPU series Model name MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71C24 , RJ71C24-R2 , RJ71C24-R4 C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU) MELSEC-Q (Q mode) QJ71C24 , QJ71C24-R2 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4 MELSECNET/H remote I/O station CNC C70...
Page 441: System Configuration
System Configuration 7.2.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series Communication driver Serial RCPU communication module Serial (MELSEC) Connection cable Connection cable Number of Serial connectable Communication Max. communication Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance module - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection...
Page 442: Connecting To Qcpu (Q Mode)
7.2.2 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver Serial QCPU communication (Q mode) Serial (MELSEC) module Connection cable Connection cable Number of Serial connectable Communication Max. communication Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance module - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) GT15-RS2-9P QJ71C24...
Page 443: Connecting To Lcpu
7.2.3 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver Serial LCPU communication Serial (MELSEC) module Connection cable Connection cable Number of Serial connectable Communication Max. communication Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance module - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection diagram 2) LJ71C24...
Page 444: Connecting To Qcpu (A Mode)
7.2.4 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) Communication driver QCPU Computer (A mode) link module Serial (MELSEC) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Computer link Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance module - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection...
Page 445: Connecting To Qnacpu (Qnacpu Type)
7.2.5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type) Communication driver Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* (When connecting to a serial communication module) (When connecting to a computer link module) Serial communication QnACPU module (QnACPU type) /Computer link module Connection cable Connection cable Serial Number of communication...
Page 446 Connection cable Serial Number of communication connectable Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model module Option device equipment type distance Computer link module - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) GT10-C02H-9SC AJ71QC24-R4 RS-422 AJ71QC24N-R4 GT01-RS4-M GT21-C30R4-25P5(3m) GT21-C100R4-25P5(10m) GT21-C200R4-25P5(20m) - (Built into GOT) GT21-C300R4- 25P5(30m)
Page 447 Connection cable Number of connectable Computer link Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance module - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection diagram 2) AJ71UC24 RS-232 GT10-C02H- 6PT9P GT01-RS4-M RS-232 connection - (Built into GOT) diagram 4) 1 GOT for 1 MELSEC-QnA...
Page 448: Connecting To Qnacpu (Qnascpu Type)
7.2.6 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) Communication driver Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* (When connecting to a serial communication module) (When connecting to a computer link module) Serial communication QnACPU module (QnASCPU type) /Computer link module Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Serial communication...
Page 449 Connection cable Number of Serial communication connectable Communication Max. module Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance /Computer link module - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) 1200m GT15-RS4-9S GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 1 GOT for 1 A1SJ71QC24 RS-422 connection serial A1SJ71QC24N RS-422...
Page 450 Connection cable Number of Serial communication connectable Communication Max. module Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance /Computer link module - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS4-9S GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 500m 1 GOT for 1 RS-422 connection MELSEC-QnA A1SJ71UC24-R4 RS-422 computer link...
Page 451: Connecting To Acpu (Ancpu Type)
7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) Communication driver Computer ACPU link module (AnCPU type) AJ71C24/UC24 Connection cable Connection cable Number of Computer link connectable Communication Max. module Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 connection...
Page 452 Connection cable Number of Computer link connectable Communication Max. module Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-25P(3m) AJ71UC24 RS-232 RS-232 connection diagram 2) GT15-RS2-9P Motion 1 GOT for 1 controller CPU computer link (A Series) module GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
Page 453: Connecting To Acpu (Anscpu Type, A0J2Hcpu, A2Ccpuc)
7.2.8 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) Communication driver ACPU Computer link (AnSPU type) module (A0J2HCPU,A2CCPUC) AJ71C24/UC24 Connection cable Connection cable Number of Computer link connectable Communication Max. module Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) A1SJ71UC24-R2...
Page 454 Connection cable Number of Computer link connectable Communication Max. module Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance A1SJ71UC24-R2 - (Built into GOT) A1SJ71C24-R2 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m) A1SJ71UC24-PRF A1SJ71C24-PRF RS-232 RS-232 connection A1SCPUC24-R2 diagram 1) A2CCPUC24 GT15-RS2-9P A2CCPUC24-PRF Motion 1 GOT for 1 controller computer link module...
Page 455: Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 7.3.1 RS-232 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 connection diagram 1) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin GOT side PLC side (D-Sub 9-pin) RS(RTS) RD(RXD) SD(TXD) RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR)
Page 456 For GT21 (When connecting to the Computer Link Module) GOT side (terminal block) PLC side RD(RXD) SD(TXD) DR(DSR) ER(DTR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) (4) RS-232 connection diagram 4) PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin For GT21 (When connecting to the R/Q/QnA Serial Communication Module) GOT side PLC side (terminal block)
Page 457: Rs-422 Cable
7.3.2 RS-422 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS-422 connection diagram 1) GOT side PLC side (2) RS-422 connection diagram 2) GOT side (connector PLC side terminal block) The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for . Return connection is not required. (3) RS-422 connection diagram 3) GOT side Unfastened cable color of...
Page 458 (4) RS-422 connection diagram 4) GOT side Unfastened cable color of (connector GT21-C R4-25P5 terminal block) Brown Orange Yellow Green ■2. Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the maximum distance. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
Page 459: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 460: Communication Detail Settings
POINT POINT Setting [Format] This setting is required for replacement of F900 series with GOT2000 series. (1) To change the communication settings of the serial communication module which is connected to F900, set as follows. The value of Transmission Speed can be set to 115200bps.
Page 461 (b) GOT communication settings Format (2) To maintain the communication settings of the serial communication module which is connected to F900, set the communication setting of the GOT as follows. The value of Transmission Speed remains 38400bps. Format Transmission Speed 38400bps ■2.
Page 462 ■3. AJ71C24/UC24 Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with Transmission Speed 4800bps,9600bps,19200bps the connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the Data Bit connected equipment.
Page 463 ■5. Serial (MELSEC) (GS) Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with 9600bps, the connected equipment. 19200bps, (Default: 115200bps) Transmission Speed 38400bps, When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment, communication is 57600bps, performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected 115200bps...
Page 464 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 465 POINT POINT POINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Disconnect the faulty station For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual.
Page 466: Plc Side Setting
PLC Side Setting The GOT operates under the following transmission specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi Electric PLC in the computer link connection. Transmission specifications Setting Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes (Odd) Stop bit 1bit Sum check Transmission speed Set the same transmission speed on both the GOT and the PLC.
Page 467: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)
7.5.1 Connecting serial communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) POINT POINT POINT Serial communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the serial communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual. ➠ Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series ■1. [Module parameter] of GX Works3 The PLC can communicate with the GOT with the default module parameter setting.
Page 468: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Q, L Series)
7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (Q, L Series) POINT POINT POINT (1) Serial communication module (Q, L Series) For details of the serial communication module (Q, L Series), refer to the following manual. ➠ Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic) ➠...
Page 469 (2) When connecting to the CH2 side Switch Description Set value Position Specified value Operation setting Data bit Parity Even/odd parity (Operates according to transmission Switch 3 the GOT side 0000H settings Stop bit specifications.) Sum check code Write during RUN Setting modifica-tions b8 to b15 ―...
Page 470: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Qna Series)
POINT POINT POINT (1) When the [intelligent function module switch setting] has been set After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. (2) Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models, two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2.
Page 471 (1) Mode setting switch Description Set value Mode setting switch Dedicated protocol (Format 5) (Binary mode) MODE The mode switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/R4). POINT POINT POINT When connecting a GOT to CH2 Set the CH1 side mode switch to any other than "0" (interlocked operation). MODE (2) Transmission specifications setting switch Transmission specifications setting switch...
Page 472 Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12) Set the transmission speed (SW09 to SW12) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. 1*2*3 Transmission speed* Setting 38400 57600 115200 4800 9600 19200 Switch SW09 SW10 SW11 SW12...
Page 473: Connecting Computer Link Module
7.5.4 Connecting computer link module POINT POINT POINT Computer link module For details of the computer link module, refer to the following manual. ➠ Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual ■1. Switch setting on the computer link module Set the Mode setting switch, the Transmission specifications switches and the Station number setting switches.
Page 474 (2) Transmission specifications switch AJ71UC24 Transmission specifications switch Setting switch Description Set value RS-232 connection SW11 Main channel setting RS-422 connection SW12 Data bit setting 8bits SW13 SW11 (Consistent with the SW12 SW14 Transmission speed setting GOT side descriptions SW13 specifications) below.
Page 475 A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4 Transmission specifications switch Setting switch Description Set value SW01 Master station/Local station setting (Setting ignored) SW02 Computer link/multi-drop selection Computer link SW03 Unused ― Write during RUN enabled/disabled SW04 Enabled setting SW05 (Consistent with the SW06 Transmission speed setting GOT side descriptions specifications)
Page 476 A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF Transmission specifications Setting switch Description Set value switch SW11 (Consistent with the See descriptions SW12 Transmission speed setting GOT side specifications) below. SW13 SW14 Data bit setting 8bits SW15 Parity bit setting SW16 Even/odd parity setting SW17 Stop bit setting 1bit SW18 Sum check setting...
Page 477 POINT POINT POINT When connecting the GT21 and the computer link module When the GT21 and the computer link module are connected via RS-232C, set the buffer memory in the computer link module using the sequence program so that CD signals are not checked.
Page 478: Precautions
Precautions ■1. Time taken until the PLC runs when connected in the multiple CPU system The following time is taken until the PLC runs. MELSEC iQ-R series, motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so...
Page 479: Bus Connection
8. BUS CONNECTION Connectable Model List ....... . 8 - 2 System Configuration .
Page 480: Connectable Model List
8. BUS CONNECTION Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU MELSEC iQ-R Bus connection Series R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU...
Page 481 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU ➠ Bus connection 8.2.1 Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) MELSEC-Q Q00UJCPU (Q mode) Q00UCPU Q01UCPU...
Page 482 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P MELSEC-L L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q Q02HCPU-A (A mode) Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA Q3ACPU ➠ Bus connection 8.2.2 (QnACPU) Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA ➠...
Page 483 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A A2SCPU Bus connection ➠ 8.2.3 (AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU ➠ MELSEC-A Bus connection 8.2.4 A0J2HCPUP21 Bus-connect the GOT on the last redundant extension base A68RB (version B or later) for the Q4ARCPU redundant system. When an extension base unit is connected, a bus connection cannot be established.
Page 484 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A0J2HCPUR21 ➠ Bus connection 8.2.4 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 MELSEC-A A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU *1*2 Q172CPU *1*2 Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Motion ➠ Bus connection Q173DCPU 8.2.1 controller Q172DCPU-S1 (Q Series) Q173DCPU-S1...
Page 485 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type CC-Link IE Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 head module CC-Link IE Field Network NZ2GF-ETB9 Ethernet adapter module ➠ CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Bus connection 8.2.1 CRnQ-700 Robot (Q172DRCPU) ➠ controller Bus connection 8.2.1 CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) (Q Series) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
Page 486: System Configuration
System Configuration POINT POINT POINT When "CONTROL BUS ERR" or "UNIT VERIFY ERR" occurs It can be considered that noise due to a long bus connection cable causes a malfunction. Check whether a signal line such as bus cable is placed near the equipment to operate. If the line is close to the equipment, make a distance of 100mm or more from the equipment.
Page 487 ■2. When 2 to 5 GOTs are connected Bus extension Extension base Intermediary (Terminating Main base unit 1st GOT connector box unit station) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 3) Extension cable GOT (1st) Main base Extension base Extension Connection cable 1) Option device...
Page 488 Communication driver Bus(Q) *4*5 GOT (terminal) *4*5 (intermediary) Connection cable 2) Model Connection cable 3) Model Max. distance Option device Option device *6*7*8 *6*7*8 GT15-75QBUSL, Between main base and GOT GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75QBUS2L, (1st): 13.2m GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QBUS, Between main base and GOT GT15-QBUS2 (terminal): 37m Between main base and GOT...
Page 489: Connecting To Qnacpu Or Ancpu
8.2.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU ■1. When one GOT is connected Communication driver Extension base Bus extension Main base unit unit connector box Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Extension cable Extension Connection cable 2) Max. distance connector Main Extension cable...
Page 490 ■2. When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected Extension base Bus extension Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT unit connector box Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) Extension cable GOT (1st) Bus connector Connection cable 2) Extension...
Page 491 Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) *3*5 *3*5 GOT (2nd) GOT (3rd) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) Max. distance Option device Option device Model Model *6*7*8 *6*7*8 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-75ABUSL (Including the extension cable length) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m...
Page 492: Connection To Qnascpu Or Anscpu
8.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU ■1. When one GOT is connected Communication driver Extension base Bus extension Main base unit unit connector box Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Extension cable Extension Connection cable 2) Max. distance connector Extension Main cable...
Page 493 Extension Connection cable 2) Max. distance connector Extension Main cable *4*5 Connection cable 1) Model Option device conversion base base GT15- GT15-75ABUSL Between extension A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15- base and GOT: 6m GT15- 75ABUS2L (Including the A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-ABUS extension cable GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2 length) GT15-A1SC50B(5m) GT15-C100EXSS-...
Page 494 ■2. When two GOTs are connected Communication driver Extension base Bus extension Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT unit connector box Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 3) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT (1st) Connection cable 2) Extension Option device Extension Bus connector...
Page 495 *3*5 GOT (2nd) Connection cable 3) Max. distance Option device Model *6*7*8 GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m GT15-75ABUS2L Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C50BS(5m) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m...
Page 496 ■3. When three GOTs are connected Extension base Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT unit Extension cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) GOT (1st) Connection cable 2) Extension Option device Extension Bus connector Main base Connection cable 1) Model...
Page 497 Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) *2*3 *2*3 GOT (2nd) GOT (3rd) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) Max. distance Option device Option device Model Model *5*6*7 *5*6*7 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m...
Page 498: Connection To A0J2Hcpu
8.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU Communication driver Power supply module Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Max. distance Power supply *2*3 Model name Connection cable 1) Model Option device module A0J2C03(0.3m) GT15-75ABUSL Between PLC and GOT: 6.6m A0J2C06(0.55m) GT15-75ABUS2L A0J2HCPU...
Page 499: Connection To Motion Controller Cpu (A273Ucpu, A273Uhcpu(-S3), A373Ucpu(-S3))
8.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU (A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3)) ■1. When one GOT is connected Communication driver Extension base Bus extension Main base unit unit connector box Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Max. distance connector Option Main...
Page 500 ■2. When two GOTs are connected Communication driver Extension base Bus extension Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT unit connector box Bus(A/QnA) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 1) Extension cable GOT (1st) Connection cable 2) Main Extension Bus connector *5*6*7...
Page 501 *2*4 GOT (2nd) Connection cable 3) Max. distance *5*6*7 Model Option device GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-C30BS(3m) Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m GT15-ABUS GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m)
Page 502 ■3. When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected Extension base Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT unit Extension cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) GOT (1st) Connection cable 2) Extension Connection Bus connector *4*5*6 Extension cable Main base...
Page 503 Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) *2*3 *2*3 GOT (2nd) GOT (3rd) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) Max. distance Option Option Model Model *4*5*6 *4*5*6 device device GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15- Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) 75ABUS2L...
Page 504: Connecting To Motion Controller Cpu (A171Scpu(-S3(N)), A171Shcpu(N), A172Shcpu(N A173Uhcpu(-S1))
8.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1)) ■1. When one GOT is connected Communication driver Extension base Bus extension Main base unit unit connector box Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Extension Connection cable 2) Max.
Page 505 Extension Connection cable 2) Max. distance Extension Main connector cable *5*6 Connection cable 1) Model Option device base conversion base Between extension GT15-75ABUSL GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) base and GOT: 3m GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) (Including the GT15-ABUS GT15-A1SC30B(3m) extension cable GT15-ABUS2 length) Between extension GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUSL base and GOT:...
Page 506 ■2. When two GOTs are connected Communication driver Extension base Bus extension Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT unit connector box Bus(A/QnA) Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) GOT (1st) Connection cable 2) Extension Extension Bus connector *7*8*9...
Page 507 *4*6 GOT (2nd) Connection cable 3) Max. distance *7*8*9 Model Option device GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-C30BS(3m) Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m GT15-ABUS GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C300BS(30m)
Page 508 ■3. When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected Extension base Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT unit Extension cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) GOT (1st) Connection cable 2) Extension Extension Bus connector *6*7*8 Main base Connection cable 1)
Page 509 Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) *3*4 *3*4 GOT (2nd) GOT (3rd) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) Max. distance Option Option Model Model *6*7*8 *6*7*8 device device GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m...
Page 510: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set the option according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 511: Communication Detail Settings
Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 512 can be indirectly specified using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD device). Set the head No. of the GOT internal data register (GD device) to be used when indirectly specifying as “Servo axis switching GD device head No.” When the set value of “Servo axis switching GD device head No.” is “10”, the values of GD10 to GD25 are servo axis numbers.
Page 513 ■3. Setting Stage No. and Slot No. POINT POINT POINT Before setting Stage No. and Slot No. The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows. • QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 16 I/O points • Other than QCPU (Q mode) : Intelligent function module of 32 I/O points At the [Detail setting], assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the PLC CPU.
Page 514 POINT POINT POINT When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the number of slots for the extension base used for GOT connection. Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot No. in the communication interface settings, set "10"...
Page 515 POINT POINT POINT Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 points) (only when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) Setting unused I/O slots as empty slots (0 points) from "PC parameters" "I/O assignments" of GX Developer allows you to use I/O numbers of "16 points number of empty slots"...
Page 516 (2) Other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension base unit. When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O slots are left on an extension base unit, set an additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O slots.
Page 517: Precautions
Precautions 8.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS ■1. Composition of GT15-C EXSS-1 It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15-C BS (10 to 30m). Calculate the cable length based on GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15-C300EXSS- 1(30m). ■2. GT15-C EXSS-1 connector Connect the connectors as follows: GT15-EXCNB PLC CPU side...
Page 518: Turning The Got On
POINT Operations causing automatic reboot of the GOT2000 Series Since the GOT2000 Series is automatically rebooted in the following cases, the power does not need to be reapplied to the GOT (OFF to ON). • When an OS is written from GT Designer3 or a SD card •...
Page 519: Powering Off Or Resetting The Plc
8.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC ■1. When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated. When the PLC CPU is restored, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring. Use System Information to reset the alarm.
Page 520: When Assigning Got I/O Signals
8.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O signals Do not use the I/O signals assigned to the PLC CPU in sequence programs, as these signals are used by the GOT system. When these signals are used, GOT functions cannot be assured. 8.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU (Q mode) ■1.
Page 521: When Connecting To A Qna(S)Cpu Or An(S)Cpu Type
■4. When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit A GOT is physically connected to the last of all extension base units. In the Stage No. setting, however, assign the GOT as a stage next to the last Q B type extension base unit. Assign the QA1S6 B type extension base unit as a stage next to the GOT.
Page 522: When Connecting Multiple Gots
When using them together, refer to the following Technical News. ➠ Precautions when Replacing GOT1000 Series with GOT2000 Series (GOT-A-0061) Precautions when Replacing GOT-A900 Series with GOT2000 Series (GOT-A-0062) The GOT2000 series cannot be used with GOTs other than GOT1000 or GOT-A900 series in a system. GOT1000 GOT-A900 GOT800 ■2.
Page 523: When Using A Plc Cpu In The Direct Mode
8.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode Note that when the I/O control mode of the PLC CPU is the direct mode, and if the 1st GOT is connected to the main or extension base unit with a 5m extension cable (GT15-AC50B, GT15-A1SC50NB), the input X of the empty I/O slot cannot be used.
Page 524: When Monitoring The Q170Mcpu, Q170Mscpu(-S1)
■2. Power-On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system Apply the power to the GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system in the following sequence. Step 1. Turn ON the GOT. Step 2. After the monitor screen is displayed on the GOT, turn ON the Q4ARCPU redundant system. At this time, a timeout is displayed on the system alarm.
Page 525: Melsecnet/H Connection (Plc To Plc Network)
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK), MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List ........9 - 2 9.2 System Configuration .
Page 526: Connectable Model List
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK), MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) Connectable Model List POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network For MELSECNET/H connection, use the MNET/H mode or MNET/H extension mode with MELSECNET/H. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. •...
Page 527 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Robot controller MELSECNET/H CR800-R(R16RTCPU) (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSECNET/10 CC-Link IE Filed MELSECNET/H RJ72GF15-T2 Network head module MELSECNET/10 FX5U MELSECNET/H MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5UC MELSECNET/10 Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU MELSECNET/H ➠...
Page 528 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU MELSECNET/H ➠ Q04UDHCPU MELSECNET/10 Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU MELSEC-Q Q26UDHCPU (Q mode) Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU MELSECNET/H ➠ Q50UDEHCPU MELSECNET/10 Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU...
Page 529 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q12DCCPU-V C Controller MELSECNET/H Q24DHCCPU-V/VG ➠ module MELSECNET/10 Q24DHCCPU-LS (Q Series) Q26DHCCPU-LS MELSECNET/H ➠ MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/10 L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P MELSEC-L L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q ➠...
Page 530 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 MELSEC-A A3NCPU (AnCPU) A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU ➠ A2USCPU-S1 MELSECNET/10 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A A2SCPU (AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24...
Page 531 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers.
Page 532 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A273UCPU A273UHCPU ➠ MELSECNET/10 A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion A171SCPU-S3 controller A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU ➠ MELSECNET/10 A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3 MELSECNET/ QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G Remote I/O station QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE...
Page 533: Melsecnet/H Network Module
9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module Model name CPU series Optical loop Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode) QJ71LP21 MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21-25 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21S-25 CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71LP21-25 C Controller module (Q Series) QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21S-25 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU. 9.1.3 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module Model name...
Page 534: System Configuration
System Configuration 9.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system Communication driver MELSECNET/H network module QCPU MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H network module Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable MELSECNET/H Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance network module MELSECNET/H GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical fiber cable...
Page 535 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. ➠ For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) Set the MELSECNET/10 mode in the communication settings.
Page 536: Connecting To The Coaxial Bus System
9.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system Communication driver MELSECNET/H QCPU network module MELSECNET/H Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable MELSECNET/H Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance network module QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H GT15-J71BR13 Optical fiber cable MELSEC-Q QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/10...
Page 537 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual. ➠ Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual For AnU MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) For the coaxial cable connector connection method, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 538: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 539: Communication Detail Settings
9.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range • MNET/H mode Set the network type. • MNET/10 mode Network Type (Default: MNET/H mode) • MNET/H Extended mode Set the network No. Network No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) Set the station No.
Page 540 For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the GOT utility, refer to the following manual: ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 541: Routing Parameter Setting
9.3.3 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 542: Plc Side Setting When Connecting To Melsecnet/H
PLC side setting when connecting to MELSECNET/H This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the case of system configuration shown as 9.4.1. When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type.
Page 543: Switch Setting Of Melsecnet/H Network Module
9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch. QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11 T.PASS D.LINK EXT.PW T.PASS D.LINK T.PASS D.LINK ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR. L ERR. ERR. STATION NO.
Page 544: Parameter Setting
9.4.3 Parameter setting ■1. Connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Network type MNET/H mode (Control station) (fixed) 0000H Starting I/O No. Network No. Total stations Group No.
Page 545 Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Monitoring time Start 0000H Station No.1 Send range 00FFH for station Start 0100H (LB) Station No.2 01FFH Start 0000H LB/LW setting Station No.1 Send range 00FFH for station Start 0100H (LW) Station No.2...
Page 546 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 547 ■2. Connecting to C Controller module (Q Series) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility. (1) Connection settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection 192.168.3.3 (Default) Target module Write authority Mark the checkbox target User name password Password Detailed settings...
Page 548 (2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Number of modules Link device refresh cycle (Use default value) Routing parameter Refer to (b). Target module Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) Network type MNET/H mode (Control station) Network No.
Page 549 POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it. Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Page 550: Controller Setting] Of Gt Designer3
9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Network Type MNET/H mode Network No. 1: Network No.1 Station No. 2: Station No.2 Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection) Retry count 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Delay Time 0sec (Use default value) Refresh Interval...
Page 551: Plc Side Setting When Connecting To Melsec/10
PLC side setting when connecting to MELSEC/10 Model name Reference QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, MELSECNET/H network module 9.5.1 QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/10 network module AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, AJ71QBR11, 9.5.2 (QnA Series) A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET/10 network module AJ71LP21, AJ71BR11, A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR1 9.5.3 (A Series) 9.5.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of system...
Page 552 ■2. Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch. QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11 T.PASS D.LINK EXT.PW T.PASS D.LINK T.PASS D.LINK ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR. STATION NO.
Page 553 ■3. Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Network type MNET/10 mode (Control station) (fixed) 0000H Starting I/O No. Network No. Total stations Group No.
Page 554 Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Monitoring time Start 0000H Station No.1 Send range 00FFH for station Start 0100H (LB) Station No.2 01FFH Start 0000H LB/LW setting Station No.1 Send range 00FFH for station Start 0100H (LW) Station No.2...
Page 555 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 556 ■4. Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility. (1) Connecting to C Controller module (Q Series) Connection settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection 192.168.3.3 (Default) Target module Write authority Mark the checkbox...
Page 557 (2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Number of modules Link device refresh cycle (Use default value) Routing parameter Refer to (b). Target module Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) Network type MNET/10 mode (Control station) Network No.
Page 558 POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it. Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Page 559 ■5. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value (Use default) Retry 3times Timeout Time 3sec POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠ 9.3.1 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) ■6.
Page 560: Connecting To Melsecnet/10 Network Module (Qna Series)
9.5.2 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA series) in the following case of system configuration. In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations.
Page 561 ■2. Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch. AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11 J71QLP21 J71QLP21S J71QBR11 RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER PC - - MNG PC - - MNG PC - - MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG...
Page 562 (2) Group number setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Group number setting switch Description Set value connection Group No. setting GROUP.NO. (No group setting) (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (3) Station number setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Station number setting switch Description Set value...
Page 563 (6) Condition setting switches Setting Setting necessity at GOT Condition setting switches Description Set value switch connection Network type OFF (fixed) (PLC to PLC net-work (PC)) OFF ON Station type ON (fixed) (Control station (MNG)) Parameter for using OFF (fixed) (common parameter (PRM)) OFF (fixed) No.
Page 564 ■3. [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Network type MNET/10 (Control station) (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000H Network No. Total stations Network range assignment Refer to (2) Refresh parameters (Use default value) Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters Refer to (3)
Page 565 (2) Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Monitoring time Start 0000H Station No.1 Send range 00FFH each station Start 0100H (LB) Station No.2 01FFH BW setting Start 0000H Station No.1 Send range 00FFH each station Start 0100H (LW)
Page 566 (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 567 ■5. Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Set value Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1 Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2 Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) POINT POINT POINT Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit...
Page 568: Connecting To Melsecnet/10 Network Module (A Series)
9.5.3 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the following case of system configuration. In this section, the network parameter (common parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to provide explanations.
Page 569 (1) Network number setting switch Network number Setting necessity at GOT Description Set value setting switch connection NETWORK NO. X100 Network No. setting *1*2 (Network No.1) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Do not specify a number between 240 and 255.
Page 570 (5) Mode setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Mode setting switch Description Set value connection MODE Mode setting (Online) 0 (fixed) 0:ONLINE(A.R) 2:OFFLINE : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (6) Condition setting switches Setting Setting necessity at GOT Condition setting switches Description Set value...
Page 571 ■3. [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection MNET/10 Network type (Control station) (fixed) Start I/O No. 0000H Network No. Total stations Network range assignment Refer to (2) Refresh parameters (Use default value) Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters Refer to (3)
Page 572 (2) Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Monitoring time Start 0000H Station No.1 Send range 00FFH each station Start 0100H (LB) Station No.2 01FFH LB/LW setting Start 0000H Station No.1 Send range 00FFH each station Start 0100H (LW)
Page 573 (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 574 ■5. Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit Item Set value Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1 Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2 Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed) POINT POINT POINT Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit...
Page 575: Precautions
Precautions ■1. Network configuration Use MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network), MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) in the MNET/10 mode, or MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) to configure a network including the GOT. The following networks including the GOT cannot be configured. •...
Page 576 ■11. Connection to Q170MCPU or Q170MSCPU(-S1) Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No.
Page 577 (Improvement measure) Add unit on PLC side Add a unit on the PLC side to disperse the GOT access destinations. station station Add station No. 2 to disperse the GOT access No. 1 No. 2 Access to station No. 1 Access to station No.
Page 578 9 - 54 9.6 Precautions...
Page 579: Cc-Link Ie Controller Network Connection
10. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List ....... 10 - 2 10.2 System Configuration .
Page 580: Connectable Model List
10. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 10.1 Connectable Model List 10.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU MELSEC iQ-R ➠...
Page 581: Connectable Model List
Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU ➠ CC-Link IE 10.2 Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU...
Page 582 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU MELSEC-Q ➠ Q04UDVCPU CC-Link IE 10.2 (Q mode) Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q12DCCPU-V C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG ➠ module CC-Link IE 10.2 Q24DHCCPU-LS (Q Series) Q26DHCCPU-LS ➠ MELSEC-QS QS001CPU CC-Link IE 10.2 L02CPU...
Page 583 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A A2SCPU (AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21...
Page 584 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Motion Q173DCPU controller Q172DCPU-S1 (Q Series) Q173DCPU-S1 Q172DSCPU ➠ CC-Link IE 10.2 Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1 MR-MQ100 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). The extension base unit (Q5 B/Q6 B) can be used.
Page 585 Cloc Communication Series Model name Connectable model Refer to type A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion A171SCPU-S3 controller A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3 QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O QJ72LP25G station QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 head module...
Page 586: Cc-Link Ie Controller Network Communication Unit
10.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit CPU series CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71GP21-SX CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU) MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) MELSEC-QS QJ71GP21-SX Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
Page 587: System Configuration
10.2 System Configuration 10.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system Communication driver RCPU CC-Link IE controller QCPU network module CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection cable Connection cable Number of CC-Link IE controller connectable network Communication Max. Cable model Model Model name Option device equipment communication...
Page 588: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 589: Communication Detail Settings
10.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range • CC IE Control Set the network Type Network Type (Default: CC IE Control) • CC IE Control extended mode Set the network No. Network No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) Set the station No.
Page 590 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 591 (a) Caution immediately after the GOT setup When a servo amplifier device where indirect specification (100 to 115) of the servo axis No. is monitored on the initial display screen, “out of device range” may occur. In that case, set the indirect specification device value before monitoring on the screen. (b) Caution for multi-channel connection (axis No.
Page 592: Routing Parameter Setting
10.3.3 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 593: Plc Side Setting
10.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link IE Controller Network module For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 594 ■3. Parameter settings (Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) (1) [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Control station (fixed) Network No. Station number setting Network range assignment Refer to (b) : Necessary...
Page 595 Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.
Page 596 ■5. Module parameter settings of System configuration2 (Network Type: Extended mode) (1) [Module parameter] of GX Works3 Module parameter Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type CC IE Control (Control station) Network No. Station number setting Network range assignment Refer to (b) : Necessary : As necessary...
Page 597 Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target Station Network No.]s.
Page 598: Connecting To C Controller Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)
10.4.2 Connecting to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings. ■1.
Page 599 ■3. Parameter settings (Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) (1) [Module parameter] of CW Configurator Module parameter Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Control station (fixed) Network No. Station number setting Network range assignment Refer to (b) Channel No.
Page 600 POINT POINT POINT When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. Routing setting Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set. However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Page 601 POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠ 10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) ■5. Module parameter settings of System configuration2 (Network Type: Extended mode) (1) [Module parameter] of CW Configurator Module parameter Item...
Page 602 Network range assignment Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Start 0000H Station No.1 00FFH Start 0100H Station No.2 01FFH B/LW setting Start 00000H Station No.1 000FFH Start 00100H Station No.2 001FFH No setting LB/LW setting (2) No setting LX/LY setting (1) No setting LX/LY setting (2)
Page 603 POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. ➠ 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting (2) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Network type CC IE Control extended mode Network No.
Page 604: Connecting To Melsec-Q/L Series
10.4.3 Connecting to MELSEC-Q/L series ■1. System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) LB0100 to LB01FF LW00100 to LW001FF CC-Link IE Controller Network * (Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Station No.
Page 605 ■3. Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-Q, QS series) of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Network type CC IE Control (Control station) (fixed) 0000H Starting I/O No.
Page 606 Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Monitoring time 2000 Start 0000H Station No.1 00FFH Start 0100H Station No.2 01FFH LB/LW setting(1) Start 00000H Station No.1 000FFH Start 00100H Station No.2 001FFH No setting LX/LY setting No setting Specify I/O master station Specify reserved station...
Page 607 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 608 ■4. Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC IE Control utility. (1) Connection settings between personal computer and C controller module (Q Series) Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection 192.168.3.3 (Default) Target module...
Page 609 (2) CC IE Control Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Number of modules Link device refresh cycle (Use default value) Routing parameter Refer to (c) Target module Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. CC IE Control Network type (Control station)
Page 610 Network range assignment Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Total stations Start 0000H Station No.1 00FFH Start 0100H Station No.2 01FFH LB/LW settings (1) Start 00000H Station No.1 000FFH Start 00100H Station No.2 001FFH No setting LX/LY settings Monitoring time (Use default value) No setting...
Page 611 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 612 ■5. GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control) Item Set value Network Type CC IE Control Network No. 1: Network No.1 Station No. 2: Station No.2 Group No. 0 (fixed) Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection) Transmission Speed 1 Gbps (fixed) Refresh Interval...
Page 613 ■6. Parameter settings (Connection to Universal model QCPU) of System configuration2 (Network Type: Extended mode) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Works2 Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Network Type CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control station) (fixed) 0000H Start I/O No.
Page 614 (2) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Network type CC IE Control extended mode Network No. 1: Network No.1 Station No. 2: Station No.2 Group No. 0 (Fixed) Mode Online (auto. reconnection) Refresh Interval High (Use default value) Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time...
Page 615: Precautions
10.5 Precautions ■1. GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller Network connection For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the GOT startup. ■2. When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed.
Page 616 ■8. Connecting one PLC with multiple GOT units When multiple GOT units are simultaneously accessing one PLC, the GOT writing process (transient/cyclic) and reading process (transient) may slow down. This slow access can be remedied with the following countermeasures. (1) Improve response speed on PLC side Insert a COM instruction on the PLC to increase the response speed.
Page 617: Cc-Link Ie Field Network Connection
11. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List ....... 11 - 2 11.2 System Configuration .
Page 618: Plc/Motion Controller Cpu
11. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List 11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU MELSEC iQ- CC-Link IE FIELD ➠...
Page 619 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU(Main base) Q25PRHCPU(Main base) Q12PRHCPU(Extension base) Q25PRHCPU(Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU...
Page 620 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q12DCCPU-V C Controller CC-Link IE Q24DHCCPU-V/VG ➠ module FIELD 11.2 Q24DHCCPU-LS (Q Series) NETWORK Q26DHCCPU-LS CC-Link IE ➠ MELSEC-QS FIELD QS001CPU 11.2 NETWORK L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT CC-Link IE L02CPU-P ➠...
Page 621 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A A2SCPU (AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU...
Page 622 Cloc Communication Series Model name Connectable model Refer to type A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion A171SCPU-S3 controller A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3 MELSECNET/ QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G Remote I/O station QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE CC-Link IE ➠...
Page 623: Cc-Link Ie Field Network Communication Unit
11.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit CPU series CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71GF11-T2 C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71EN71 CNC C80 RD77GF4, RD77GF8, RD77GF16, RD77GF32 CR800-R(R16RTCPU) MELSEC iQ-F Series FX5-CCLIEF MELSEC-Q(Universal model) C Controller module (Q Series)
Page 624: Connecting To Cc-Link Ie Field Network Communication Unit
Use hubs that satisfy the following conditions. • Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) • Supporting the auto MDI/MDI-X function • Supporting the auto-negotiation function • Switching hub (A repeater hub is not available.) Recommended switching hub (Mitsubishi Electric products) Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG-T8 For details, refer to the following manual.
Page 625 The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 626 11.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range • CC IE Field Set the network Type Network Type Set the network No. of the GOT. Network No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) Set the station No. of the GOT. Station No.
Page 627 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 628 (a) Caution immediately after the GOT setup When a servo amplifier device where indirect specification (100 to 115) of the servo axis No. is monitored on the initial display screen, “out of device range” may occur. In that case, set the indirect specification device value before monitoring on the screen. (b) Caution for multi-channel connection (axis No.
Page 629 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 630 11.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link IE controller network module in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link IE Field Network Module For details of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 631 Network Configuration Settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Start 0000H Rx/RY setting Station No.1 00FFH Rx/RY, RWw/RWr setting(1) Start 00000H RWw/RWr setting Station No.1 00007H Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
Page 632 POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. ➠ 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting ■3. GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) Item Set value...
Page 633: Connection To C Controller Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)
11.4.2 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings. ■1.
Page 634 Network Configuration Settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Start 0000H Rx/RY setting Station No.1 00FFH Rx/RY, RWw/RWr setting(1) Start 00000H RWw/RWr setting Station No.1 00007H Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
Page 635: Connecting To Melsec-Q/L Series
POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT. For the setting, refer to the following. ➠ 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting ■3. GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) Item Set value...
Page 636 ■2. Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-Q, QS series) of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) (1) Network parameter] of GX Works2 Use GX Works2 of Version 1.31H or later. Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Network type CC IE Field (Master station) (fixed) 0000H...
Page 637 Network Configuration Settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Start 0000H Station Rx/RY setting No.1 00FFH Rx/RY, RWw/RWr setting(1) Start 00000H Station RWw/RWr setting No.1 000FFH Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
Page 638 Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
Page 639 ■3. GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field) Item Set value Network Type CC IE Field Network No. 1: Network No.1 Station No. 1: Station No.1 Group No. 0 (fixed) Mode Setting Online Refresh Interval 25ms (Use default value) Input for Err.
Page 640: Precautions
11.5 Precautions ■1. GOT startup in CC-Link IE Field Network connection For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, the data link is started approximately 15 seconds after the GOT startup. ■2. When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed.
Page 641 ■7. When the output is required to be held at the data link failure Set the GOT to hold the input from the data link faulty stations in the communication setting. Set "Input for Error Station" to "Hold". ➠ 11.3.2 Communication detail settings ■8.
Page 642 Split the network Split the network to disperse the GOT access. Split the network to disperse the GOT access 11 - 26 11.5 Precautions...
Page 643: Cc-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)
12. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List ....... 12 - 2 12.2 System Configuration .
Page 644: Connectable Model List
12. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 12.1 Connectable Model List 12.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU MELSEC iQ-R ➠...
Page 645 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU MELSEC-Q ➠ CC-Link(ID) 12.2 Q00UCPU (Q mode) Q01UCPU Q02UCPU...
Page 646 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type MELSEC-QS QS001CPU L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-B L02CPU-P ➠ MELSEC-L CC-Link(ID) 12.2.2 L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q ➠ Q02HCPU-A CC-Link(ID) 12.2.1 (A mode) Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA ➠ Q3ACPU CC-Link(ID) 12.2.1 (QnACPU)
Page 647 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 MELSEC-A ➠ A3ACPUR21 CC-Link(ID) 12.2.1 (AnCPU) A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1...
Page 648 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 ➠ CC-Link(ID) 12.2.1 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU *1*2 Q172CPU *1*2 Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Motion ➠ CC-Link(ID) Q173DCPU 12.2 controller Q172DCPU-S1 (Q Series) Q173DCPU-S1...
Page 649 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion A171SCPU-S3 controller ➠ CC-Link(ID) 12.2.1 A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3 QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H Remote I/O QJ72LP25G station QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE...
Page 650: Cc-Link Module
12.1.2 CC-Link module CPU series CC-Link module MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ61BT11 CNC C80 CR800-R(R16RTCPU) MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) QJ61BT11 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ61BT11N CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700)
Page 651: System Configuration
12.2 System Configuration 12.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible Communication driver CC-Link module CC-Link Ver2(ID) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model CC-Link module Option device equipment type distance MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC RJ61BT11...
Page 652: Connecting With Cc-Link Ver.2 Compatible
12.2.2 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible Communication driver CC-Link module CC-Link Ver2(ID) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model CC-Link module Option device equipment type distance MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller RJ61BT11...
Page 653: Connecting With Cc-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 Compatibles Mixed
12.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed Communication driver CC-Link QCPU module CC-Link Ver2(ID) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. Model name Cable model Model CC-Link module Option device equipment type distance MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link dedicated Series GT15-J61BT13 cable CC-Link (Ver.2)
Page 654: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type : Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 655: Communication Detail Settings
12.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range Set the station No. of the GOT. Station No. 1 to 64 (Default: 1) Set the transmission speed and the mode of the GOT. 0 to E Transmission Rate (Default: 0) Set the mode of CC-Link.
Page 656 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 657 (a) Caution immediately after the GOT setup When a servo amplifier device where indirect specification (100 to 115) of the servo axis No. is monitored on the initial display screen, “out of device range” may occur. In that case, set the indirect specification device value before monitoring on the screen. (b) Caution for multi-channel connection (axis No.
Page 658: Plc Side Setting
12.4 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown below in the CC-Link system. Station data Description Station type Intelligent device station, Ver.1 intelligent device station or Ver.2 intelligent device station Number of stations occupied Station 1 or Station 4 The switch settings and parameter settings of the PLC side (CC-Link module) are described in 12.4.5 to 12.4.11.
Page 659: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Melsec Iq-R Series) With Ver.1 Compatible
12.4.1 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual.
Page 660 Link refresh setting Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Special relay (SB) refresh device Special register (SW) refresh device Remote input (RX) refresh device Remote output (RY) refresh device Set as necessary. Remote register (RWr) refresh device : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting...
Page 661 ■3. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry 3times (Use default value)
Page 662: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Melsec Iq-R Series) With Ver.2 Compatible
12.4.2 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.2 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.2 compatible in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual.
Page 663 Link refresh setting Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Special relay (SB) refresh device Special register (SW) refresh device Remote input (RX) refresh device Remote output (RY) refresh device Set as necessary. Remote register (RWr) refresh device : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting...
Page 664 ■3. [Communication settings] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time...
Page 665: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Melsec Iq-R Series) With Ver.1/Ver.2 Compatibles Mixed
12.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following manual.
Page 666 Link refresh setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Special relay (SB) refresh device Special register (SW) refresh device Remote input (RX) refresh device Remote output (RY) refresh device Set as necessary. Remote register (RWr) refresh device : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting...
Page 667 ■3. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT) Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear...
Page 668: Connection To C Controller Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)
12.4.4 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following case of system configuration. Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 669 Link refresh setting Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Remote input (RX) refresh device Remote output (RY) refresh device Set as necessary. Remote register (RWr) refresh device : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CC-Link configuration setting •...
Page 670 ■3. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT) Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear...
Page 671: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Q Series) With Ver.1 Compatible
12.4.5 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (Q Series) For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 672 ■2. Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST ERR. L ERR. STATION MODE (FG) (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection...
Page 673 ■3. Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter Setting necessity Item Set value at GOT connection No. of boards in module Start I/O No. 0000H Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Remote net...
Page 674 Station information setting Setting necessity Set value Item at GOT connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed) Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver.
Page 675 (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings Setting necessity at GOT Set value Item connection Number of modules Target module Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Remote net Mode (Ver.1 mode) Expanded cyclic setting Single Operation Occupied number...
Page 676 ■5. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry 3times (Use default value)
Page 677: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Q Series) With Ver.2 Compatible
12.4.6 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.2 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (Q Series) in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (Q Series) For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 678 ■2. Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST ERR. L ERR. STATION MODE (FG) (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection...
Page 679 ■3. Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection No. of boards in module 0000H Start I/O No. Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station Remote net...
Page 680 Station information setting Setting necessity at GOT Set value Item connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed) Single Expanded cyclic setting Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Remote station points 32 points (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary...
Page 681 (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings Setting necessity at GOT Set value Item connection Number of modules Target module Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) Type Master station Remote net Mode (Ver.2 mode) Expanded cyclic setting Single Operation Occupied number...
Page 682 ■5. [Communication settings] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station Clear Retry 3times (Use default value) Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
Page 683: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Q Series) With Ver.1/Ver.2 Compatibles Mixed
12.4.7 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (Q Series) For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to the following manual.
Page 684 ■2. Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST ERR. L ERR. STATION MODE (FG) (1) Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection...
Page 685 ■3. Parameter setting (when connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection No. of boards in module 0000H Start I/O No. Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Remote net...
Page 686 Station information setting • Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT) Setting necessity at GOT Set value Item connection Ver.1 intelligent Station type device station (fixed) Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary...
Page 687 ■4. Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC-Link utility. (1) Connection settings Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection 192.168.3.3 (Default) Target module Write authority Mark the checkbox target User name password Password Detailed settings...
Page 688 (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings] Parameter settings Setting necessity at GOT Set value Item connection Number of modules Target module Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) Type Master station Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) Expanded cyclic setting Single Operation Occupied number...
Page 689 ■5. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT) Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear...
Page 690: Connecting To Melsec-L Series With Cc-Link Ver.1 Compatible
12.4.8 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT (1) CC-Link module (L Series) For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 691 ■2. [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection No. of boards in module 0000H Start I/O No. Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Remote net Mode (Ver.1 mode) All connect count Remote input (RX) X400...
Page 692 (2) Station information setting Setting necessity at GOT Set value Item connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed) Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver.
Page 693: Connecting To Melsec-L Series With Cc-Link Ver.2 Compatible
12.4.9 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT (1) CC-Link module (L Series) For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 694 ■2. [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection No. of boards in module 0000H Start I/O No. Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.2 mode) All connect count Remote input (RX) X400...
Page 695 (2) Station information setting Setting necessity at GOT Set value Item connection Station type Ver.2 intelligent device station (fixed) Single Expanded cyclic setting Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Remote station points 32 points (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary...
Page 696: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Qna Series)
12.4.10 Connecting to CC-Link module (QnA Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (QnA Series) in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (QnA Series) For details of the CC-Link module (QnA Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 697 ■2. Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA Series) Set for each setting switch. AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 1SJ61QBT11 J61QBT11 ERR. M / S 156K ERR. 625K 2. 5M S MST TIME S MST LOCAL LINE LOCAL CPU R / W CPU R / W L RUN M / S TEST...
Page 698 (3) Transmission speed setting switch Transmission speed setting Setting necessity at Description Set value switch GOT connection B RATE Transmission speed setting (156kbps) 0 156K 1 625K 2 2. 5M 3 5M 4 10M : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.
Page 699 ■3. Parameter setting There are two methods for the parameter setting: perform the setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer and the sequence program. Performing it from the [Network parameter] of the GX Developer can be set only when the PLC CPU and the CC-Link module use the function version B or later.
Page 700 Station information setting Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection Station type Intelligent device station (fixed) Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station count Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same number of occupied stations as that of the GOT.
Page 701 Buffer memory settings used in the present example Buffer memory address Item Set value Decimal (Hex) 1(11 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module) 2(22 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times) 3(33 (3H) Automatic reconnection station count 1 (1 station) 6(66 (6H) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure 0 (stop)
Page 702 Example of sequence program Parameter setting Module error Module ready Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification (No specification) Error invalid station specification (No...
Page 703 ■4. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry 3times (Use default value)
Page 704: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (A Series)
12.4.11 Connecting to CC-Link module (A Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-Link module (A Series) in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (A Series) For details of the CC-Link module (A Series), refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 705 ■2. Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) Set for each setting switch. AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 1SJ61BT11 J61BT11 ERR. M / S 156K ERR. 625K S MST TIME 2. 5M S MST LOCAL LINE LOCAL CPU R / W CPU R / W L RUN M / S TEST...
Page 706 (3) Transmission speed setting switch Transmission speed setting Setting necessity at GOT Description Set value switch connection B RATE Transmission speed setting (156kbps) 0 156K 1 625K 2 2. 5M 3 5M 4 10M : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.
Page 707 ■3. Sequence program The parameter setting and the sequence program of the data link startup request is required. (1) Programming condition (with CC-Link dedicated instructions) The program sets the network parameter and automatic refresh parameter when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN, and automatically starts the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions.
Page 708 Example of sequence program (CC-Link dedicated instruction) * Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction Module error Module ready Synchronous mode (Invalid) Number of connected modules (1 module) Station data (intelligent device station, exclusive station 1, station No.1) Send buffer size (64 words) Receive buffer size (64 words)
Page 709 Head No. of RX (RX0) RX refresh destination (X) RX refresh destination device head No. (400) No. of refresh points (32) RY head number (RY0) RY refresh destination (Y) RY refresh destination device head No. (400) No. of refresh points (32) RW head No.
Page 710 (2) Program condition (for FROM/TO instruction) This program writes parameters to the buffer memory when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO instruction. I/O signal of CC-Link module ➠ Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual Devices used by user Device...
Page 711 Example of sequence program (FROM/TO instruction) * Parameter setting Module error Module ready Number of connected modules (1 module) Number of retry (3 times) Number of automatic return stations (1 station) Operation specification in the case of CPU failure (Stop) Reserved station specification (No specification)
Page 712 ■4. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry 3times (Use default value)
Page 713: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Melsec Iq-F Series, Melsec-Fx) With Ver.1/Ver.2 Compatibles Mixed
12.4.12 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series, MELSEC-FX) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series, MELSEC-FX) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series, MELSEC-FX) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series, MELSEC-FX), refer to the following manual.
Page 714 (2) Transmission speed/Mode setting switch Transmission speed/Mode setting Setting necessity at GOT Description Set value switch connection Transmission speed/Mode setting ○ (Online: 156kbps) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 715 Station Information Setting • Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT) Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station Type Ver.1 Intelligent Device Station (fixed) ○ Occupied Station 3 ○ Number of Occupied Stations Reserve/Invalid Station Select No Setting ○...
Page 716 Buffer memory settings used in the present example Buffer memory address Item Set value Decimal (Hex) 0(0H) Mode 2 (Remote net (Ver.2 mode)) 1(1H) Number of connected modules 2 (2module) 2(2H) Retry Count 7 (7times) 3(3H) Automatic Reconnection Station Count 2 (2module) 6(6H) PLC Down Select...
Page 717 Example of sequence program M8000 FNC 79 K4M20 BFM#10 M35 to M20 FROM monitor Unit error Unit ready FNC 12 Mode Remote net ver. 1 mode FNC 12 Number of connected units (2 units) Number of retries FNC 12 (7 times) Number of automatic FNC 12 return units...
Page 718 From the previous page Station information(1st unit) FNC 12 Ver. 1 compatible intelligent H2301 device station (GOT) FNC 12 Station information(2nd unit) HC104 Ver. 2 compatible intelligent device station (GOT) FNC 78 Station information M8002 Refresh command Initial pulse Unit error Unit ready When data link startup by buffer...
Page 719 ■4. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller Setting of Station No.1 (GOT) Item Set value Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Expanded Cyclic Number of stations occupied 1 Stations Input for Error Station 0: Clear Retry...
Page 720: Connecting To Cc-Link Module (Melsec Iq-F Series) With Ver.1/Ver.2 Compatibles Mixed
12.4.13 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series) For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-F Series), refer to the following manual.
Page 721 Link refresh setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Special relay (SB) refresh device Special register (SW) refresh device Remote input (RX) refresh device Set as necessary. Remote output (RY) refresh device Remote register (RWr) refresh device Remote register (RWw) refresh device : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary...
Page 722 POINT POINT POINT When changing the module parameter After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC CPU. ■3. [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT) Item Set value Station No.
Page 723: Precautions
12.5 Precautions ■1. Using cyclic transmission (1) I/O signal for master station Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master station. When the reserved output signal is turned on, the PLC system may be malfunctioned. For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to the following manual.
Page 724 ■6. Connection to LCPU LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available. When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a system alarm occurs.
Page 725 GOT access is concentrated at one unit (Improvement measure) Add unit on PLC side Add a unit on the PLC side to disperse the GOT access destinations. station station Add station No. 2 to disperse the GOT access No. 1 No.
Page 726 12 - 84 12.5 Precautions...
Page 727: Cc-Link Connection (Via G4)
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via 13.1 Connectable Model List ....... 13 - 2 13.2 System Configuration .
Page 728: Connectable Model List
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 13.1 Connectable Model List 13.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link (G4) Series R04ENCPU...
Page 729 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU CC-Link (G4) Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) CC-Link (G4) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU MELSEC-Q Q00UCPU ➠...
Page 730 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type Q12DCCPU-V C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG ➠ module CC-Link(G4) 13.2.1 Q24DHCCPU-LS (Q Series) Q26DHCCPU-LS MELSEC-QS QS001CPU L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P ➠ MELSEC-L CC-Link(G4) 13.2.2 L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q Q02HCPU-A (A mode) Q06HCPU-A...
Page 731 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A A2SCPU (AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU *1*2 Q172CPU *1*2 Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN...
Page 732 Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU Motion A171SCPU-S3 controller A171SCPU-S3N (A Series) A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 WS0-CPU3 MELSECNET/ QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G Remote I/O station QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 head module...
Page 733: Cc-Link Module/Peripheral Module
13.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module Model name CPU series CC-Link module Peripheral module MELSEC-Q (Q mode) C Controller module (Q Series) QJ61BT11 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) AJ65BT-G4-S3 QJ61BT11N CNC C70 AJ65BT-R2N Robot controller (CRnQ-700) MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 13 - 7 13.1 Connectable Model List...
Page 734: System Configuration
13.2 System Configuration 13.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver CC-Link (G4) Peripheral QCPU CC-Link module connection module Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Peripheral connection Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) module Number of connectable CC-Link Cable model Option Cable Max.
Page 735 Peripheral connection Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) module Number of connectable CC-Link Cable model Option Cable Max. Model Communication Max. equipment module Model name Connection Model model distance name type distance device diagram number - (Built into GOT) GT01-C30R4- 25P(3m) GT01-C100R4- 25P(10m)
Page 736: Connecting To Lcpu
13.2.2 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver Peripheral CC-Link LCPU connection module CC-Link (G4) module Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Peripheral connection Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) module Number of connectable CC-Link Cable model Option Model Cable Max. Model Communication Max.
Page 737 Peripheral connection Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) module Number of connectable CC-Link Cable model Option Model Cable Max. Model Communication Max. equipment module Connection diagram Model name model distance name type distance device number - (Built into GOT) GT09-C30R2-9P GT15- RS2-9P RS-232 connection...
Page 738: Connection Diagram
13.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 13.3.1 RS-232 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS-232 connection diagram 1) GOT side PLC side (D-Sub 9-pin) RS(RTS) SD(TXD) RD(RXD) SD(TXD) RD(RXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS)
Page 739: Rs-422 Cable
13.3.2 RS-422 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS-422 connection diagram 1) GOT side Unfastened cable color of (connector terminal block) GT10-C R4-25P  Brown Orange Yellow Green Blue Purple Black White (2) RS-422 connection diagram 2) Unfastened cable color of GT21-C R4-25P5 Brown...
Page 740: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 741: Communication Detail Settings
13.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range 9600bps, Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the 19200bps, Transmission Speed connected equipment. 38400bps (Default: 9600bps) 57600bps 115200bps Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. Retry 0 to 5times (Default: 0time)
Page 742 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 743 POINT POINT POINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. Disconnect the faulty station For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following manual.
Page 744: Plc Side Settings
13.5 PLC Side Settings Model Reference AJ65BT-G4-S3 13.5.1 Peripheral connection module AJ65BT-R2N 13.5.2 13.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT (1) Peripheral connection module For details of the peripheral connection module, refer to the following manual.
Page 745 (1) Station number setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Station number setting switch Description Set value connection STATION NO. ×10 ×1 AJ65BT-G4-S3 1 to 64 station number setting : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (2) Data link transmission speed setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Data link transmission speed setting switch Description...
Page 746: Connecting Aj65Bt-R2N
13.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N This section describes the settings of the GOT and peripheral connection module in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT (1) Peripheral connection module For details of the peripheral connection module, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 747 (2) Data link transmission speed setting switch Setting necessity at GOT Data link transmission speed setting switch Description Set value connection 0: 156kbps 1: 625kbps Data link transmission speed 2: 2.5Mbps setting 3: 5Mbps 4: 10Mbps : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (3) Mode setting switch Setting necessity at GOT...
Page 748: Switch Setting Of Cc-Link Module (Q Series)
13.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N L RUN S MST ERR. L ERR. STATION MODE (FG) ■1. Station number setting switch Station number Setting necessity Description Set value...
Page 749: Network Parameter] Of Gx Developer
13.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer ■1. Network parameter Setting necessity Item Set value at GOT connection No. of boards in module Start I/O No. 0000H Operation setting (Use default value) Type Master station (fixed) Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode) All connect count Remote input (RX) X400...
Page 750 ■2. Station information setting Setting necessity Set value Item at GOT connection Intelligent device Station type station (fixed) Number of stations occupied Exclusive station 1 (fixed) Reserve/invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (Ver.
Page 751: Parameter Setting (When Connecting To C Controller Module (Q Series))
13.5.5 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller module setting utility. ■1. Connection settings Setting necessity Item Set value at GOT connection 192.168.3.3 Target module Write authority Mark the checkbox target User name password...
Page 752 ■2. [Parameter Setting] of CC-Link utility (1) Network parameter Setting necessity Item Set value at GOT connection Number of modules Target module Start I/O No. 0000H Channel No. (Use default value) type Master station(fixed) Remote net (Ver.1 mode) Mode Expanded cyclic station Single(fixed) Operation Occupied number...
Page 753: Controller Setting] Of Gt Designer3
13.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Item Set value 9600bps 19200bps Transmission Speed 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Retry Count 0 to 5times Timeout Time 3 to 30sec Delay Time 0 to 300ms POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 754: Precautions
13.6 Precautions ■1. Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
Page 755 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 14. INVERTER CONNECTION ......14 - 1 15. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION ....15 - 1 16.
Page 757 14. INVERTER CONNECTION 14.1 Connectable Model List ....... 14 - 2 14.2 System Configuration .
Page 758: Connectable Model List
14. INVERTER CONNECTION 14.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Clock Refer to Model name Connectable model type FREQROL-A500/A500L ➠ FREQROL-F500/F500L RS-485 14.2.1 FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E ➠ FREQROL-F500J RS-485 14.2.2 FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-F700PJ ➠ FREQROL-E700 RS-485 14.2.3 FREQROL...
Page 759: System Configuration
14.2 System Configuration 14.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L ■1. When connecting to one inverter Communication driver Computer link Inverter option FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of connectable Computer link Communication Connection diagram Max. equipment Model name Model Option device option...
Page 760 ■2. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Distributor Connection Connection Inverter cable 1) cable 2) Number of Terminal...
Page 761 ■3. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link option) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Computer Computer Inverter link Inverter link option option Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Max. connectable Computer link Communication Connection diagram distance Model name Model...
Page 762: Connecting To Freqrol-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700Pj
14.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ ■1. When connecting to one inverter Communication driver Inverter FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of connectable equipment Communication Connection diagram Max. Model name Model Option device type number distance - (Built into GOT) RS-485 500m GT15-RS4-9S...
Page 763 ■2. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Terminal cable Distributor Connection Connection Inverter cable 1) cable 2) Number of Terminal...
Page 764: Connecting To Freqrol-E700/Sensorless Servo (Freqrol-E700Ex)
14.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL-E700/sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX) ■1. When connecting to one inverter Communication driver Inverter Control Sensorless terminal FREQROL 500/700/800, servo option SENSORLESS SERVO Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of connectable Control terminal Communication Connection diagram Max. Model name Model Option device equipment...
Page 765 ■2. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Inverter Inverter Sensorless Sensorless servo servo Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Distributor Connection Connection Inverter...
Page 766 ■3. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the control terminal option) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Inverter Control Inverter Control Sensorless terminal Sensorless terminal servo option servo option Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Max. connectable Control terminal Communication Connection diagram...
Page 767: Connecting To Freqrol-A700/F700/700P/A800/F800/A800 Plus
14.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P/A800/F800/A800 Plus ■1. When connecting to one inverter Communication driver Communication driver Inverter Control Sensorless terminal FREQROL 500/700/800, servo option FREQROL 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Connection cable (For automatic connection) Inverter Connection cable Number of Control connectable Communication Connection diagram Max.
Page 768 Inverter Connection cable Number of Control connectable Communication Connection diagram Max. Model name terminal Model Option device equipment type number distance option - (Built into GOT) RS-485 500m GT15-RS4-9S connection diagram 5) FREQROL-A800-E RS-485 1 GOT for 1 inverter A8ERS GT10-C02H-9SC RS-485 500m...
Page 769 ■2. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, FREQROL 800 SENSORLESS SERVO (For automatic connection) Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection Connection Inverter...
Page 770 ■3. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block) Communication driver Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, FREQROL 800 SENSORLESS SERVO (For automatic connection) Inverter Control Inverter Control Sensorless terminal Sensorless terminal servo option servo option Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of...
Page 771 UP to 10 inverters can be connected to the GS. The GOT(except the GS) have the RS-485 interface. The GS has the RS-422 interface. The GOT supports the FREQROL-B/B3 series that is an explosion-proof type of FREQROL-A700/A800. GT25-W does not support the option device. 14.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522- K(-A0)
Page 772 ■2. When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection Connection Inverter Distributor cable 1) cable 2) Number of Terminating...
Page 773: Connection Diagram
14.2.6 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the inverter. ■1. RS-485 cable RS-485 connection diagram 1) Inverter or Distributor side GOT side (Modular connector) In the case of GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23, set the terminating resistor to "Disable". In the case of GT2505-V, GT21, set the terminating resistor to "330Ω".
Page 774 RS-485 connection diagram 4) FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side (terminal block) (terminal block) (terminal block) GOT side Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from the GOT.
Page 775 RS-485 connection diagram 6) Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 terminal block terminal block terminal block Station No.0, Station No.1, Station No.n, GOT side or A8ERS or A8ERS or A8ERS SDA2 SDA1 RDB1 SDB2 SDB1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1 RDB1 SDB1 RDB2 SDA1 SDA2...
Page 776 RS-485 connection diagram 8) FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side terminal block terminal block terminal block GOT side Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT. In the case of GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable".
Page 777 (11) RS-485 connection diagram 11) GOT side FR-A5NR side (connector terminal block) (terminal block) Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR. The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR. Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". ➠...
Page 778 (13) RS-485 connection diagram 13) Inverter side GOT side built-in RS485 terminal block, (connector terminal block) or A8ERS RDA1(RXD1+) RDB1(RXD1-) SDA1(TXD1+) SDB1(TXD1-) SG(GND) Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". ➠ 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for .
Page 779 (15) RS-485 connection diagram 15) GOT side FR-E7TR side (connector terminal block) (terminal block) Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". ➠ 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for .
Page 780 Modular ceiling rosette HAKKO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. BMJ-8 (Distributor) TEL(03)-3806-9171 Cable conforming to EIA568 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CABLE Cable SGLPEV 0.5mm (such as cable 10BASE-T) INDUSTRIES, LTD. (4) Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link option Attach this option to the A500, F500 and V500 Series.
Page 781 (5) Terminal block layout in the FR-E7TR control terminal option Mount the FR-E7TR to the E700 series and the sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX series). Set the terminal 2/SG switch to the OPEN OPEN right position (ON) to change the terminal 2 to the terminal SG. To the GOT or the previous inverter...
Page 782: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 783 ■2. Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. (1) FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Item Description Range 9600bps, Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 19200bps, Transmission Speed communication with the connected equipment. 38400bps, (Default: 19200bps) 57600bps, 115200bps...
Page 784 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manuals. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 785: Freqrol Series Inverter Side Settings
14.2.8 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series. ■1. Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter...
Page 786 ■2. Connecting FREQROL-E500 series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.146, Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
Page 787 ■3. Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124 FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter...
Page 788 ■4. Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342 FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter...
Page 789 ■5. Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342 FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342 (2) Communication settings of inverter...
Page 790 PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 With CR, without LF Protocol selection Pr.549 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU operation mode Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 Network operation mode. Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342...
Page 791 PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 With CR, without LF Protocol selection Pr.549 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU operation mode Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 Network operation mode. Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342...
Page 792 RS-485 communication waiting time setting PU communication CR/LF selection/ Pr.124 Pr.341 With CR, without LF RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Protocol selection Pr.549 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol PU operation mode connector Operation mode selection Pr.79 External operation mode at power RS-485 Refer to Pr.79 settings.
Page 793 PU communication waiting time setting Pr.123 PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 With CR, without LF Protocol selection Pr.549 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol External operation mode at power Operation mode selection Pr.79 Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 Network operation mode. Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342...
Page 794 RS-485 communication waiting time setting PU communication CR/LF selection/ Pr.124 Pr.341 With CR, without LF RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Protocol selection Pr.549 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol PU connector PU operation mode Operation mode selection Pr.79 RS-485 External operation mode at power on PU connector Refer to Pr.79 settings.
Page 795 ■11. Connecting FREQROL-A800, F800 series Configure the inverter communication settings by one of the following three methods. To automatically reconfigure the GOT side communication settings to the inverter side communication settings in batches and to perform the automatic connection, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 796 The following shows the values to be automatically set in batches when the above values are set for Pr.999. Pr.999=10 Pr.No. Setting item Set value Operation mode selection PU communication speed PU communication stop bit length PU communication parity check Number of PU communication retries 9999 PU communication check time interval...
Page 797 RS-485 communication waiting time setting PU communication CR/LF selection/ Pr.124 Pr.341 With CR, without LF RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Protocol selection Pr.549 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol PU connector PU operation mode Operation mode selection Pr.79 External operation mode at power RS-485 PU connector Refer to Pr.79 settings.
Page 798 PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 With CR, without LF Protocol selection Pr.549 Mitsubishi Electric inverter protocol Operation mode selection Pr.79 PU operation mode Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 Network operation mode. Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342...
Page 799 ■13. Connecting MD-CX522- K(-A0) Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124 (2) Communication settings of inverter Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
Page 800: Station Number Setting
14.2.9 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station Station Station Station Station...
Page 801: Precautions
14.2.10 Precautions ■1. Station No. of inverter system The station No. required for the inverter system will differ according to the selected driver. • When selecting [FREQROL 500/700/800 sensor-less servo] Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0 station. • When selecting [FREQROL 800] Make sure to establish inverter system with the station number set with the host address.
Page 802: Ethernet Connection
14.3 Ethernet Connection 14.3.1 Connection to FREQROL-A800/F800-E Series Communication driver Inverter Ethernet(FREQROL), Gateway Connection cable Maximum Number of *1*2 segment connectable Connection cable Communication Model name Model Option device equipment length type • 100BASE-TX - (Built into GOT) Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of FREQROL-A800-E category 5 or higher...
Page 803: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Ethernet(FREQROL) • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Ethernet(FREQROL), Gateway Step 4.
Page 804 ■2. Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range Set the network No. of the GOT. GOT Net No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) Set the station No. of the GOT. 1 to 120 GOT Station (Default: 18) 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534...
Page 805 [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 806 POINT POINT POINT Ethernet setting for GT21 and GS (1) Effective range of the Ethernet setting Only [1] to [4] of the Ethernet setting can be used for the GT21 and the GS. Even though [5] or later of the Ethernet setting is written to the GT21 and the GS, the setting is disabled on the GT21 and the GS side.
Page 807: Inverter Side Settings
14.3.3 Inverter side settings For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series. ■1. Connecting FREQROL-A800/F800-E series (1) Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection Parameters corresponding to inverter...
Page 808 Parameter Set value Contents of setting Setting item Ethernet IP address 1 Pr.1434 (Built-in Ethernet) Set the first octet with Pr .1434. Ethernet IP address 2 Set the second octet with Pr .1435. Pr.1435 (Built-in Ethernet) Set the third octet with Pr .1436. 0 to 255 Set the fourth octet with Pr .1437.
Page 809: Precautions
14.3.4 Precautions ■1. Connection port Please be sure to connect an Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port. When connecting an Ethernet cable by mistake to a PU port, there is a fear that equipment is damaged. ■2. Monitoring devices(RS, WS, A, Pr, PG, SP) Is from a plurality of GOT, it will not be able to monitor the device(RS, WS, A, Pr, PG, SP) of a single inverter at the same time.
Page 810: Device Range That Can Be Set
14.4 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Page 811 (Ethernet connection) Item Description Set the device name, device number, and bit number. Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device. Information Displays the device type and its setting range selected in [Device]. Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.
Page 812 (2) Setting the device using the device definition dialog box. Step 1. Set the device comment/definition list. Select [Project] [Import Device Comment/Definition/Tag] [Device Comment/Definition] to display the following dialog box. Step 2. Click the [Add...] button. Step 3. Select a model of the inverter for [Controller] and click the [OK] button. Step 4.
Page 813 Step 5. When setting a device on the Device dialog box and click the [Switch to the device setting dialog] button, the correspondence between the GOT virtual device for an inverter and the definition of the inverter is displayed. 9. 10. The device can be searched with the inverter definition or other items on this dialog box to set a device.
Page 814 ■2. Inverter (FREQROL 500/700/800 series), sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX) Device Device name Setting range No. representation Inverter 0-0 RS0 to 0-31 RS15 status monitor 0-100 RS0 to 0-115 RS15 (RS) Bit device Decimal Run command (WS) 0-0 WS0 to 0-31 WS15 *4*5 0-100 WS0 to 0-115 WS15 Alarm definition (A)
Page 815 Device SP121 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Write 1 to the bit of device SP121 that corresponds to the Reset command (WS11). In this example, device SP121 must store 0800H. Convert 0800H to a decimal value (2048), and then write 2048 to device SP121.
Page 816 (1) Inverter status monitor An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown below. For the setting items of other than the FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual. ➠ User's Manual of the used inverter (communication function (setting item and set data)) Device name Description Inverter running (RUN)
Page 817 For the details of the inverter parameters, refer to the following. ➠ Manual of the inverter used (3) Alarm definition Description Device name Second alarm in past Latest alarm Fourth alarm in past Third alarm in past Sixth alarm in past Fifth alarm in past Eighth alarm in past Seventh alarm in past...
Page 818 (5) Programmed operation The devices below correspond to the parameters (Pr.201 to Pr.230) of FREQROL-A500 series. Device name Description PG0toPG9 Program set 1 (running frequency) Program set 1 (time) PG10toPG19 PG20toPG29 Program set 1 (rotation direction) PG30toPG39 Program set 2 (running frequency) Program set 2 (time) PG40toPG49 PG50toPG59...
Page 819 (6) Special parameter The numbers of the inverter’s virtual devices (SP) used for the GOT correspond to instruction codes of the inverter communication function. For instruction details, and values to be read and written, refer to the following, ➠ Manual of the inverter used Instruction code Device name Description...
Page 820 ■3. Inverter (FREQROL 800 series) (Automatic connection) Device Device name Setting range No. representation 0-0 RS0 to 0-31 RS15 Inverter status monitor (RS) 0-100 RS0 to 0-115 RS15 Decimal 0-0 WS0 to 0-31 WS15 *3*4 Run command (WS) 0-100 WS0 to 0-115 WS15 0-0 X00 to 0-31 X7F Input (X) 0-100 X00 to 0-115 X7F...
Page 821 command (WS3), write numerical values to device SP122 as necessary. As the following figure shows, each operation mode is assigned to device SP122. The following shows an example for Forward rotation command (WS1) and Low speed operation command (WS3). The SM device cannot be specified as a word device. For the applicable SM devices, refer to the following.
Page 822 14 - 66 14.4 Device Range that Can Be Set...
Page 823 15. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List ....... 15 - 2 15.2 System Configuration .
Page 824: Connectable Model List
15. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type MR-J2S- A MELSERVO-J2- RS-232 ➠ MR-J2S- CP 15.2.1 Super RS-422 MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A RS-232 ➠ MELSERVO-J2M 15.2.2 RS-422...
Page 825: System Configuration
15.2 System Configuration 15.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series ■1. When connecting via RS-232 communication Communication driver Servo amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE Connection cable MITSUBISHI CHARGE Servo amplifier Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Cable model Max. Series name Model Option device equipment...
Page 826 ■2. When connecting via RS-422 communication Communication driver Servo Servo amplifier amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI CHARGE CHARGE Connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Max. Number of connectable Communication Connection diagram distance equipment Series name Model Option device type number - (Built into GOT)
Page 827: Connecting To The Melservo-J2M Series
15.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series ■1. When connecting via RS-232 communication Communication driver Servo amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE Connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Cable model Max. Series name Model Option device equipment type Connection diagram number distance (Built into GOT)
Page 828 ■2. When connecting via RS-422 communication Communication driver Servo Servo amplifier amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE MITSUBISHI CHARGE Connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Connection diagram Max. Series name Model Option device equipment type number distance - (Built into GOT) RS-422 connection GT15-RS4-9S...
Page 829: Connecting To The Melservo-J4, J3 Series
Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. DSV-CABV is a product manufactured by Diatrend Corporation. For details, contact Diatrend Corporation. FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
Page 830 (2) When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-422 connection) Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE Servo Servo amplifier amplifier Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection Connection Connection Distributor Distributor Terminating Servo amplifier cable...
Page 831 GOT) Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of this product, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together.
Page 832 ■2. When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a motion controller or simple motion module Servo Servo Motion controller amplifier amplifier CPU, or PLC CPU Varies according to the connection type. SSCNET /H Servo amplifier Motion controller CPU, or PLC Number of Simple motion connectable...
Page 833 ■3. When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a simple motion module or CC- Link IE field network master/local module Servo Servo amplifier amplifier Varies according to the connection type. CC-Link IE Field network Servo amplifier Number of Simple motion connectable Option Communication...
Page 834: Connecting To The Melservo-Je Series
15.2.4 Connecting to the MELSERVO-JE Series ■1. When directly connecting the GOT to a servo amplifier (1) When connecting via RS-422 communication Communication driver Servo Servo amplifier amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI CHARGE CHARGE Connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Max.
Page 835 ■2. When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a motion controller or simple motion module Servo Servo Motion controller amplifier amplifier CPU, or PLC CPU MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI CHARGE CHARGE Varies according to the connection type. Servo amplifier Motion controller CPU, or PLC Number of connectable Communication...
Page 836: Connection Diagram
15.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the servo amplifier. 15.3.1 RS-232 cable ■1. Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1) Connector for interface unit's or GOT side servo amplifier's CN3 CD/NC Plate SD(TXD) RD(RXD) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) DR(DSR)
Page 837: Rs-422 Cable
■2. Precautions when preparing cable (1) Cable length The length of the cable RS-232 must be 15m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. ➠ 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 15.3.2 RS-422 cable ■1.
Page 838 (3) RS-422 connection diagram 3) Distributor side Distributor side (Modular connector) (Modular connector) (4) RS-422 connection diagram 4) Servo amplifier side Distributor side (Modular connector) (Modular connector) Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as possible. (5) RS-422 connection diagram 5) Distributor side (Modular connector)
Page 839 (6) RS-422 connection diagram 6) Connector for interface unit's Connector for interface unit's Connector for interface unit's GOT side 1st axis servo amplifier's CN3 2nd axis servo amplifier's CN3 32nd axis (last axis) CN3) Plate Plate Plate At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN. The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for .
Page 840 ■2. Precautions when preparing cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. ➠ 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications (3) Servo amplifier connector Use the connector compatible with the servo amplifier.
Page 841: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Interface to be used •...
Page 842 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 843: When Connecting The Got And Servo Amplifiers Through A Motion Controller Or Simple Motion Module
15.4.2 When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a motion controller or simple motion module The GOT side settings differ depending on the connection type between the GOT and a motion controller or PLC. For details of the GOT side settings, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 844: Setting On Servo Amplifier Side
15.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side Model name Refer to MELSERVO-J2-Super Series 15.5.1 MELSERVO-J2M Series 15.5.2 MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE-□A, JE Series 15.5.3 15.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series POINT POINT POINT MELSERVO-J2-Super Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 845: Connecting To The Melservo-J2M Series
15.5.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series POINT POINT POINT MELSERVO-J2M Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2M Series, refer to the following manual. ➠ MELSERVO-J2M Series Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual ■1. Parameter of MELSERVO-J2M Series Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2M Series. Item Set value Serial communication function selection...
Page 846: Connecting To The Melservo-J4,J3, Je-□A Series
POINT POINT POINT (1) Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software. Pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier MODE DOWN (2) When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter.
Page 847: Station Number Setting
15.5.4 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station Station Station Station Station...
Page 848: Device Range That Can Be Set
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Page 849 (1) Device Definition dialog box When setting a device on the Device dialog box and click the [Device Definition...] button, the correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier and the definition of the servo amplifier is displayed. 4.
Page 850 POINT POINT POINT (1) When selecting [All] in the Network setting The network No. 0 and Station No. FF are displayed on Device List and when printing. (Device List screen) (2) Monitoring servo amplifier Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be connected and fully understand the operating procedures before monitoring.
Page 851 [Format]: [Unsigned Decimal] • Decimal notation (positive and negative values) [Data Type]: [Signed BIN16] ([Signed BIN32] for -32769 or less, and 32768 or more) [Format]: [Signed Decimal] • Hexadecimal notation [Data Type]: [Unsigned BIN16] ([Unsigned BIN32] for 0x10000 or more) [Format]: [Hexadecimal] •...
Page 852 ■2. MELSERVO-J2M-P8A Device No. Setting range available Device name representation Servo amplifier request (SP) SP1 to SP2 Bit device Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM4 Basic parameter PRM0 to PRM29 PRM1000 to PRM1029 Expansion parameter (PRM) Status display (ST) ST0 to ST2 Decimal AL11 to AL13...
Page 853 (3) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Device name Item Symbol PRM0, PRM1000 Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear *BPS PRM1, PRM1001 Regenerative brake option selection *REG PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM3, PRM1003 Analog monitor 1 output PRM4, PRM1004 Analog monitor 2 output PRM5, PRM1005 Analog monitor 3 output PRM6, PRM1006...
Page 854 (5) Alarm Device name Item Symbol Current alarm number ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load factor ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs peak bus voltage ― Alarm number from alarm history AL200 ―...
Page 855 ■3. MELSERVO-J2M-*DU Device No. Setting range Device name representation Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Bit device Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB0 to TMB1 Basic parameter PRM0 to PRM84 PRM1000 to PRM1084 Expansion parameter (PRM) Status display (ST) ST0 to ST10...
Page 856 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. (1) Servo amplifier request Device name Item Symbol Status display data clear ― Current alarm clear ― Alarm history clear ―...
Page 857 Device name Item Symbol PRM34, PRM1034 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PRM36, PRM1036 Speed loop gain 1 PRM37, PRM1037 Speed loop gain 2 PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation PRM40 to PRM41, PRM1040 to PRM1041 For manufacturer setting...
Page 858 (6) Alarm Device name Item Symbol Current alarm number ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses ― Servo status when alarm occurs AL12 ― servo motor speed AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses ―...
Page 859 (8) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ― (9) Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) ―...
Page 860 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. (1) Servo amplifier request Device name Item Symbol Status display data clear ― Current alarm clear ― Alarm history clear ―...
Page 861 Device name Item Symbol PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4 PRM23, PRM1023 Feed forward gain PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed PRM25, PRM1025 Analog speed command maximum speed/limit maximum speed PRM26, PRM1026 Analog torque command maximum output PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1...
Page 862 Device name Item Symbol PRM70, PRM1070 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3 PRM71, PRM1071 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4 PRM72, PRM1072 Internal speed command4/limit4 PRM73, PRM1073 Internal speed command5/limit5 PRM74, PRM1074 Internal speed command6/limit6 PRM75, PRM1075 Internal speed command7/limit7 PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 PRM77 to PRM84, PRM1077 to PRM1084...
Page 863 Device name Item Symbol Alarm number from alarm history AL201 ― first alarm in past Alarm number from alarm history AL202 ― second alarm in past Alarm number from alarm history AL203 ― third alarm in past Alarm number from alarm history AL204 ―...
Page 864 ■5. MELSERVO-J2S-*CP Device No. Setting range Device name representation Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Bit device Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand(for test operation) (TMB) TMB0 to TMB1 PRM0 to PRM90 Basic parameter/expansion parameter (PRM) PRM1000 to PRM1090 Status display (ST) ST0 to ST16...
Page 865 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. (1) Servo amplifier request Device name Item Symbol Status display data clear ― Current alarm clear ― Alarm history clear ―...
Page 866 Device name Item Symbol PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset...
Page 867 (5) Status display Device name Item Symbol Current position ― Command position ― Command remaining distance ― Point table No. ― Cumulative feedback pulses ― Servo motor speed ― Droop pulses ― Override ― Torque limit voltage ― Regenerative load ratio ―...
Page 868 Device name Item Symbol Alarm number from alarm history AL205 ― fifth alarm in past Alarm occurrence time in alarm history AL210 ― most recent alarm Alarm occurrence time in alarm history AL211 ― first alarm in past Alarm occurrence time in alarm history AL212 ―...
Page 869 (10) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ― (11) Set data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― TMD1 Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant (test mode) ―...
Page 870 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. (1) Servo amplifier request Device name Item Symbol Status display data clear ― Current alarm clear ― Alarm history clear ―...
Page 871 Device name Item Symbol PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset...
Page 872 Device name Item Symbol PRM74, PRM1074 OUT1 output time selection OUT1 PRM75, PRM1075 OUT2 output time selection OUT2 PRM76, PRM1076 OUT3 output time selection OUT3 PRM77, PRM1077 Selected to program input polarity selection 1 SYC1 PRM78 to PRM90, PRM1078 to PRM1090 For manufacturer setting ―...
Page 873 Device name Item Symbol Servo status when alarm occurs AL27 ― Load inertia moment ratio AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― Alarm number from Alarm History AL200 ― most recent alarm Alarm number from Alarm History AL201 ―...
Page 874 (7) External I/O signal Device name Item Symbol Input device statuses ― External input pin statuses ― Statuses of input devices switched on through communication ― Output device statuses ― External output pin statuses ― (8) Current position latch data Device name Item Symbol...
Page 875 ■7. MELSERVO-J3-*A Device No. Setting range Device name representation Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Bit device Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6 PA1 to PA19 Basic setting parameter (PA) PA1001 to PA1019 PB1 to PB45 Gain filter parameter (PB)
Page 876 The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo amplifier used with the GOT. (1) Servo amplifier request Device name Item Symbol Status display data clear ― Current alarm clear ― Alarm history clear ―...
Page 877 (5) Gain filter parameter Device name Item Symbol Adaptive tuning mode PB1, PB1001 FILT (Adaptive filter II) Vibration suppression control filter tuning mode PA2, PB1002 VRFT (Advanced vibration suppression control) Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant PB3, PB1003 (position smoothing) PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting...
Page 878 (6) Extension setting parameter Device name Item Symbo PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant PC5, PC1005 Internal speed command1/limit1 PC6, PC1006 Internal speed command2/limit2 PC7, PC1007 Internal speed command3/limit3 PC8, PC1008...
Page 879 (7) I/O setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PD1, PD1001 Input signal automatic ON selection 1 *DIA1 PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ― PD3, PD1003 Input signal device selection 1 (CN1-15) *DI1 PD4, PD1004 Input signal device selection 2 (CN1-16) *DI2 PD5, PD1005 Input signal device selection 3 (CN1-17)
Page 880 (9) Alarm Device name Item Symbol Current alarm number ― Detailed data of current alarms ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs servo monitor speed ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ―...
Page 881 (10) External input Device name Item Symbol Input device statuses ― External input pin statuses ― Statuses of input devices switched on through communication ― (11) External output Device name Item Symbol Output device statuses ― External output pin statuses ―...
Page 882 ■8. MELSERVO-J3-*T Device No. Setting range Device name representation Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Bit device Operation mode selection (OM) OM0 to OM5 Decimal Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6 PA1 to PA19 Basic setting parameter (PA) PA1001 to PA1019 PB1 to PB45 Gain filter parameter (PB)
Page 883 POINT POINT POINT Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices, double word devices Only writing is possible.
Page 884 (4) Basic setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG PA3, PA1003 Absolute position detection system *ABS PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1 PA5, PA1005 Feeding function selection *FTY PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator *CMX PA7, PA1007...
Page 885 Device name Item Symbol PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant Gain changing, Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia PB29, PB1029 GD2B moment PB30, PB1030 Gain changing, Position loop gain PG2B PB31, PB1031 Gain changing, Speed loop gain VG2B PB32, PB1032...
Page 886 Device name Item Symbol PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD PC37, PC1037 Position range output address + Low *LPPL PC38, PC1038 Position range output address + High *LPPH PC39, PC1039 Position range output address - Low *LNPL PC40, PC1040 Position range output address - High *LNPH PC41 to PC50, PC1041 to PC1050 For manufacturer setting...
Page 887 Device name Item Symbol MR-J3-D01 PO7, PO1007 Input signal device selection 6 *ODI6 (CN10-35, 36) MR-J3-D01 PO8, PO1008 Output signal device selection 1 *ODO1 (CN10-46, 47) MR-J3-D01 PO9, PO1009 Output signal device selection 2 *ODO2 (CN10-48, 49) PO10, PO1010 Function selection 0-1 *OOP1 PO11, PO1011 For manufacturer setting...
Page 888 (10) Alarm Device name Item Symbol Current alarm number ― Detailed data of current alarms ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Current position ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Command position ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs Command remaining distance ―...
Page 889 Device name Item Symbol Detailed alarm from alarm history AL234 ― Fourth alarm in past Detailed alarm from alarm history AL235 ― Fifth alarm in past (11) External input Device name Item Symbol Input device statuses 1 ― Input device statuses 2 ―...
Page 890 ■9. MELSERVO-J4-*A, -JE-*A Device No. Setting range Device name represen tation Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 OM0 to OM2 Operation mode selection (OM) Bit device Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6 OTI0 to OTI5 One-touch tuning command (OTI) PA1 to PA32 Basic setting parameter (PA) PA1001 to PA1032...
Page 891 POINT POINT POINT Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD devices (1) For bit devices Only writing is possible. [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. (2) For word devices, double word devices Only writing is possible.
Page 892 (5) Basic setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY PA2, PA1002 Regenerative option *REG Absolute position detection system *ABS PA3, PA1003 PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1 PA5, PA1005 Number of command input pulses per revolution *FBP Electronic gear numerator PA6, PA1006...
Page 893 Device name Item Symbol PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation PB13, PB1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1 PB15, PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 PB16, PB1016 Notch shape selection 2 NHQ2 PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting PB19, PB1019...
Page 894 (7) Extension setting parameter Device name Item Symbol PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant PC3, PC1003 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant Internal speed command 1 PC5, PC1005 Internal speed limit 1 Internal speed command 2 PC6, PC1006 Internal speed limit 2...
Page 895 Device name Item Symbol Analog torque command offset PC38, PC1038 Analog torque limit offset PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset PC41 to 42, PC1041 to 1042 For manufacturer setting ― PC43, PC1043 Error excessive alarm detection level PC44 to 50, PC1044 to 1050 For manufacturer setting ―...
Page 896 Device name Item Symbol PD28, PD1028 Output device selection 6 *DO6 PD29, PD1029 Input filter setting *DIF PD30, PD1030 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 PD31, PD1031 For manufacturer setting ― PD32, PD1032 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 PD33, PD1033 For manufacturer setting ―...
Page 897 Item Device name Symbol PL19 to PL48, PL1019 to PL1048 For manufacturer setting ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data. These devices cannot be used for MELSERVO-JE (12) Status display Device name...
Page 898 Device name Item Symbol AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm ― AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in past ― AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past ― AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past ―...
Page 899 Device name Item Symbol ALM200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm ― ALM201 Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in past ― ALM202 Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past ― ALM203 Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past ―...
Page 900 MELSERVO-JE is equivalent to MELSERVO-J4. However, they have differences in the parameter function. For using the MELSERVO-JE series, refer to the following. ➠ MELSERVO-JE Series Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual (15) Machine diagnosis data Device name Item Symbol Machine diagnosis data parameter number ―...
Page 901 Device name Item Symbol TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ― ■10. MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ Device No. Setting range Device name representation Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 OM0 to OM2 Operation mode selection (OM) OM4 to OM5 Bit device Decimal Instruction demand (for test operation) (TMB) TMB1 to TMB6...
Page 902 Device No. Setting range Device name representation Word device DO0 to DO4 Decimal External output (DO) LD0 to LD1 Current position latch data (LD) RR1 to RR4 The value of the general-purpose register (Rx) (RR) RR1001 to RR1004 The value of the general-purpose register (Dx) (RD) RD1 to RD4 Double word device Decimal...
Page 903 (3) Instruction demand (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol TMB1 Temporary stop command ― TMB2 Test operation (positioning operation) start command ― TMB3 Forward rotation direction ― TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ― TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ― TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―...
Page 904 (6) Gain filter parameter Device name Item Symbol PB1, PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode (adaptive filter II) FILT Vibration suppression control tuning mode (advanced vibration PB2, PB1002 VRFT suppression control II) Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (position PB3, PB1003 smoothing) PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting...
Page 905 Device name Item Symbol PB51, PB1051 Notch form selection 5 NHQ5 PB52, PB1052 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency VRF21 PB53, PB1053 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency VRF22 PB54, PB1054 Vibration suppression control 2 - Vibration frequency dumping VRF23 PB55, PB1055 Vibration suppression control 2 - Resonance frequency dumping...
Page 906 Device name Item Symbol Home position return deceleration time constant/Deceleration time PC31, PC1031 STB2 constant 2 PC32, PC1032 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 CMX2 PC33, PC1033 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3 PC34, PC1034 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4 PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2/internal thrust limit 2...
Page 907 Device name Item Symbol PD23, PD1023 Output device selection 1 *DO1 PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2 PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3 PD26, PD1026 Output device selection 4 *DO4 PD27, PD1027 For manufacturer setting ― PD28, PD1028 Output device selection 6 *DO6 PD29, PD1029...
Page 908 Device name Item Symbol PE50, PE1050 Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band LMCT PE51 to PE64, PE1051 to PE1064 For manufacturer setting ― For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data.
Page 909 (13) Positioning control parameter Device name Item Symbol PT1, PT1001 Command mode selection *CTY PT2, PT1002 Function selection T-1 *TOP1 PT3, PT1003 Feeding function selection *FTY PT4, PT1004 Home position return type *ZTY PT5, PT1005 Home position return speed PT6, PT1006 Creep speed PT7, PT1007 Home position shift distance...
Page 910 (14) Status display Device name Item Symbol Cumulative feedback pulses ― Servo motor speed ― Droop pulses ― Cumulative command pulses ― Command pulse frequency ― Analog speed command voltage/Analog speed limit voltage ― Analog torque limit voltage/Analog torque command voltage ―...
Page 911 (15) Alarm (compatible with MELSERVO-J3-*A) Device name Item Symbol Current alarm number ― Detailed data of current alarms ― AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses ― AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor speed ― AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ―...
Page 912 Device name Item Symbol ALM18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio ― ALM19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio ― ALM20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― ALM21 Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous torque ―...
Page 913 Device name Item Symbol ALM215 Alarm number from Alarm History 15th alarm in past ― ALM220 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm ― ALM221 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st alarm in past ― ALM222 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd alarm in past ―...
Page 914 (18) Machine diagnosis data Device name Item Symbol Machine diagnosis data parameter number ― Machine diagnosis data shift judgment ― (test mode) Machine diagnosis data status ― Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in positive direction ― Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in positive direction ―...
Page 915 (24) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx) Device name Item Symbol The value of the general-purpose register (D1) ― The value of the general-purpose register (D2) ― The value of the general-purpose register (D3) ― The value of the general-purpose register (D4) ―...
Page 916: When Connecting The Got And Servo Amplifiers Through A Motion Controller Or Simple Motion Module
15.6.2 When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a motion controller or simple motion module ■1. Device settings For details of the device setting, refer to the following. ➠ 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 15 - 94 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set...
Page 917: Precautions
15.7 Precautions ■1. Station number setting in the servo system Make sure to establish servo system with the station number set with the host address. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. ➠ ■1. Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) ■2.
Page 918 15 - 96 15.7 Precautions...
Page 919 16. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List ....... 16 - 2 16.2 System Configuration .
Page 920: Connectable Model List
When the robot controller is connected, use the GOT outside the safety fence. 16.2 System Configuration 16.2.1 Connecting to robot controller (CR800-D, CRnD-700) Communication driver Robot controller Ethernet(MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC),Gateway Connection cable Robot controller Maximum Number of connectable *1*2 segment Connection cable...
Page 921: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Type to be connected. • I/F: Standard I/F(Ethernet):Multi •...
Page 922: Communication Detail Settings
16.3.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 239 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18) 1 to 64 GOT Station 1024 to 5010 and 5014 to 65534 Set the GOT port No.
Page 923: Ethernet Setting
Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (3) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 924: Robot Controller Side Settings
16.4 Robot controller Side Settings Model Reference ➠ CR800-D 16.4.1 Robot controller ➠ CRnD-700 16.4.2 16.4.1 Connecting to robot controller (CR800-D) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT...
Page 925 ■3. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Set value GOT Net No. GOT PC No. GOT Ethernet Setting 192.168.0.18 GOT Communication Port No. 5001 Retry 3 times Startup Time 3 sec Timeout Time 3 sec Delay Time 0 ms (2) GOT Ethernet Setting...
Page 926: Connecting To Robot Controller (Crnd-700)
16.4.2 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Robot controller (CRnD-700) For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refer to the following manual. CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL ■1.
Page 927 (2) For R32TB or R56TB (For R56TB) Setting necessity at GOT Item Set value connection NETIP 192.168.0.19 GOTPORT 5001 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary ■3. [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Communication settings Item Set value GOT NET No.
Page 928 (3) Ethernet setting Item Set value Host N/W No. PLC No. Ethernet setting No.1 Unit Type CRnD-700 IP address 192.168.0.19 Port No. 5001 (fixed) Communication UDP (fixed) POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. ➠...
Page 929: Melsec Iq-R, Rnmt/Nc/Rt, Cr800-D (Gt27, Gt25 Only)
16.5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. ➠ 2.1 MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/NC/RT, CR800-D (GT27, GT25 only) ➠ 2.2 MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT/RT, CR800-D (GT21 only) ➠...
Page 930 16 - 12 16.6 Precautions...
Page 931: Connectable Model List
17. CNC CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List ....... 17 - 2 17.2 System Configuration .
Page 932: Connectable Model List
Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. For the connection to CNC C80, CNC C70, refer to Mitsubishi Electric Products (Chapter 5 to Chapter 13). 17 - 2...
Page 933: System Configuration
17.2 System Configuration 17.2.1 Direct connection to CPU Communication driver MELDAS F311 cable C6/C64 AJ71C24, MELDAS C6* Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. Model name F311 cable Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance - (Built into GOT) MELDAS C6/C64 RS232 connection RS-232...
Page 934: Melsecnet/10 Connection (Plc To Plc Network)
17.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case that MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station. •...
Page 935: Cc-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)
17.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) Communication driver MELDAS Expansion C6/C64 unit CC-Link Ver2(ID) Connection cable Connection cable Number of connectable Communication Max. Model name Expansion unit Cable model Model Option device equipment type distance MELDAS C6/C64 FUC6-HR865 CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link(ID) 26 GOTs...
Page 936: Ethernet Connection
17.2.4 Ethernet connection Communication driver Expansion MELDAS Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, C6/C64 unit CRnD-700, and gateway Connection cable Connection cable Number of Maximum connectable Communication segment Model name Expansion unit Cable model Model Option device equipment type length • 100BASE-TX Shielded twisted pair cable - (Built into GOT) (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP) of category...
Page 937: Connection Diagram
17.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the CNC. 17.3.1 RS-232 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS232 connection diagram 1) MELDAS C6/C64 side*1 GOT side (20 pin half pitch) RD(RXD) SD(TXD) ER(DTR) DR(DSR) RS(RTS) CS(CTS) ER(DTR) For details of the MELDAS C6/C64 side connection, refer to the following manuals.
Page 938: Got Side Settings
Step 2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* I/F: Interface to be used • Driver:...
Page 939: Communication Detail Settings
17.4.2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. ■1. AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* Item Description Range 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with Transmission Speed 38400bps, 57600bps, the connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the Data Bit...
Page 940 Item Description Range Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. Retry 0 to 5times When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times) Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90sec Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination Delay Time...
Page 941 ■3. CC-Link Ver.2 (ID) Item Description Range Station No. Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1) 1 to 64 Set the transmission speed and the mode of the GOT. (Default: 0) 0 to E Transmission Rate Ver.1/Ver.2/ Mode Set the mode of CC-Link.
Page 942: Got Side Settings
For details of the hardware test, refer to the following manual. ➠ CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link module to be used In the case of M700VS/M70V series, Transmission method is set to "cyclic". 17 - 12 17.4 GOT Side Settings...
Page 943 Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 944: Got Ethernet Setting
17.4.3 GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting. ■1. GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. • Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) • Extension port (When using GT25-W, port 2) ■2.
Page 945: Ethernet Setting
17.4.4 Ethernet setting Item Description Range Host The host is displayed. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*)) ― N/W No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) Network No. of CNC Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank) Station No.
Page 946: Cnc Side Settings
17.5 CNC Side Settings 17.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection ■1. Parameter setting Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer. However, in the case of using the default parameters or not requiring separate settings due to normal stations, it is not necessary to set the network (1) Control Station Parameter If you wish to place the control station in CNC and set the common parameters, set the network parameters by...
Page 947 ■2. Expansion unit settings (1) FCU6-EX879 (Optical fiber cable) Switch name Settings Condition setting Set the operation condition. switch Description Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net Network type Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG) Station type Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM) Used parameter Number of stations Station...
Page 948 (2) FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable) Switch layout Switch name Settings Set the operation condition. Description Network Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net Condition setting type switch Station Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG) type Used parameter Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM) Number of stations (Valid when...
Page 949: Cc-Link(Id) Connection To Meldas C6/C64
17.5.2 CC-Link(ID) connection to MELDAS C6/C64 ■1. Parameter setting Set parameters related to CC-Link connection with GX Developer and write them to CNC by PLC. However, in the case of using the local stations, it is not necessary to set the network parameters. (1) Master station parameter It is necessary to set and write the network parameters to CNC with GX Developer.
Page 950 ■2. Expansion unit settings Make the communication settings by the setting switch in the expansion unit (FCU6-HR865). (1) Expansion unit 17 - 20 17.5 CNC Side Settings...
Page 951 (2) Contents of setting Switch name Settings Set the operation condition. Switch status Setting validity Master Local Condition setting station station Description switch (Standby (Standby master master station) station) Master station/local station Standby master station (Valid) (Valid) Station type Not used Always OFF Not used Always OFF...
Page 952: Cc-Link(Id) Connection To M700Vs/M70V Series
17.5.3 CC-Link(ID) connection to M700VS/M70V series For details of the CC-Link settings of M700VS/M70V series, please contact our company. 17.5.4 Ethernet connection ■1. System configuration The following shows the example of the system configuration when using the CNC monitor function. ...
Page 953 Example of GX Developer setting For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following. ➠ C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 POINT POINT POINT IP address setting IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid. Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side, referring to the next page.
Page 954: Melsec-Qna, Meldas C6
17.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following. ➠ 2.5 MELSEC-QnA, MELDAS C6 * 17.7 Precautions 17.7.1 Direct connection to CPU ■1. Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version D0 or later.
Page 955: Cc-Link (Id) Connection
17.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection ■1. Using cyclic transmission (1) I/O signal for master station Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master station. When the reserved output signal is turned on, the CNC system may be malfunctioned. For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to the following manual.
Page 956: Ethernet Connection
17.7.4 Ethernet connection ■1. Via network system GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the CNCs in another network via the CNC (network module, Ethernet module, etc.). ■2. When connecting to multiple GOTs When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT. ➠...
Page 957 18. LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List ....... . 18 - 2 18.2 System Configuration .
Page 958: Connectable Model List
18. LASER DISPLACEMENT SENSOR MH11 CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to type MH11CTMF-N MH11CTMF-NNA Laser Displacement ➠ × RS-232 18.2.1 Sensor MH11 MH11CTMF-P MH11CTMF-PNA GT2104-PMBDS2 only supported. 18.2 System Configuration 18.2.1 Connecting to the Laser Displacement Sensor MH11...
Page 959: Connection Diagram
18.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the Controller. 18.3.1 RS-232 cable ■1. Connection Diagram (1) RS-232 connection diagram 1) GOT side Untied wire color (terminal block) of MH11C30R2 24V+ White 24V- Black Green Yellow ■2.
Page 960: Got Side Settings
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3. Set the following items. • Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Controller Type: Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 • I/F: Interface to be used • Driver: Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 Step 4.
Page 961: Communication Detail Settings
[Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 962: Laser Displacement Sensor Mh11 Side Settings
18.5 Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 Side Settings 18.5.1 Connecting to the Laser Displacement Sensor MH11 ■1. Communication settings Communication settings are not required, since the following contents are fixed. Setting item Controller Side Settings Communication speed 115200bps (fixed) Data Bit 8bit (fixed) Parity bit None (fixed)
Page 963 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION ....19 - 1 20. MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION ..20 - 1...
Page 965 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored......19 - 2 19.2 Connectable Model List .
Page 966: Cpu That Can Be Monitored
19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly. Serial Multi-Drop Unit 19 - 2 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored...
Page 967: Connectable Model List
19.2 Connectable Model List ■1. Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master module") directly The following table shows the connectable models. Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module...
Page 968 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU RS-232 RS-485 RS-422 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)
Page 969 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module Q12DCCPU-V C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG module RS-232 RS-485 (MELSEC iQ- Q24DHCCPU-LS R Series) Q26DHCCPU-LS MELSEC- QS001CPU When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
Page 970 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT RS-232 L02CPU-P RS-485 MELSEC-L RS-422 L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q RS-232 Q02HCPU-A RS-485 RS-422 (A mode) Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 RS-422...
Page 971 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A RS-422 RS-485 (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 RS-422 RS-485 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 RS-422 RS-485...
Page 972 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU-S3 A373UCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. •...
Page 973 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU Motion controller RS-422 RS-485 CPU (A Series) A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 RS-232 WS0-CPU3 QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25G RS-232 remote I/O station QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE Field Network...
Page 974 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-D700 FREQROL FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 FREQROL-F700P FREQROL-A800 FREQROL-F800 Sensorless servo FREQROL-E700EX MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0) MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A...
Page 975 ■1. Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master module") in computer link connection The following table shows the connectable models. Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module R04CPU...
Page 976 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU RS-232 RS-485 RS-422 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base)
Page 977 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module Q12DCCPU-V C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG module RS-232 RS-485 (MELSEC iQ- Q24DHCCPU-LS R Series) Q26DHCCPU-LS MELSEC-QS QS001CPU When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No.
Page 978: Melsec-L
Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P RS-232 RS-485 MELSEC-L RS-422 L06CPU-P L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q Q02HCPU-A (A mode) Q06HCPU-A Q2ACPU Q2ACPU-S1 RS-232 RS-485 MELSEC-QnA RS-422...
Page 979 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 MELSEC-A RS-232 A3ACPUR21 (AnCPU) RS-422 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1...
Page 980 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2SCPU A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU *1*2 Q172CPU...
Page 981 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later Use main modules with the following product numbers.
Page 982 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU Motion controller CPU (A Series) A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25G remote I/O station QJ72BR15 CC-Link IE Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 head module...
Page 983 Communication type Between Between CPU Series Model name Clock Connectable model master and master module and module FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-D700 FREQROL FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 FREQROL-F700P FREQROL-A800 FREQROL-F800 Sensorless servo FREQROL-E700EX MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0) MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MR-J2S- CL MR-J2M-P8A...
Page 984: Melsec-A
■1. [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 The following table shows the [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 for which the GOT multi- drop connection is available. Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit GOT type Connection type Type Serial Multi-Drop Connection driver MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 DIRECT...
Page 985: System Configuration
19.3 System Configuration Communication driver Communication driver Connection type Multi-Drop (Slave) dependent (Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit) (GOT) Serial multi drop connection unit Varies according to the connection type. Connection cable Connection cable Serial Multi-Drop Connection Connection cable Number of Unit Max.
Page 986: Connection Diagram
19.4 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the cable connection between the serial multi-drop connection unit and the GOT. 19.4.1 RS-485 cable ■1. Connection diagram (1) RS-485 connection diagram 1) GOT side (9 pin) GOT side (9 pin) GOT side (9 pin) Terminal Terminal Terminal...
Page 987 (2) RS-485 connection diagram 2) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi drop connection unit GOT side GOT side GOT side SDA1 SDA2 SDA1 SDB1 SDB2 SDB1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1 RDB1 RDB2 RDB1 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2 SDB2 SDB1 SDB2 RDA2 RDA1 RDA2 RDB2 RDB1...
Page 988 (4) RS-485 connection diagram 3) (For 1 pair wiring) Serial multi-drop connection unit GOT side GOT side GOT side Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN". Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ". ➠ 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT It is a connector pin number of GT10-C02H-9SC.
Page 989 Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm2 or more as a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following shows recommended model names and manufacturers of the cable to be used. Manufacturer Model Remark Mitsubishi Electric Cable Industries,Ltd SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P Two-pair cable of 0.5mm2 KMPEV-SB Showa Electric Wire & Cable Co.,Ltd Two-pair cable of 0.5mm2...
Page 990 ■3. Connecting terminating resistors When connecting a Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. (1) For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". (2) For GT2505-V, GT21 Set the terminating resistor selector.
Page 991: Got Side Settings
19.5 GOT Side Settings 19.5.1 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Set the channel of connecting equipment. Click! Step 1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu. Step 2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. Step 3.
Page 992: Communication Detail Settings
Settings] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. ➠ GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (2) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Page 993: Setting Of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6.1 Write the OS Write the standard monitor OS and communication driver according to the desired connection type onto the serial multi-drop connection unit. For the OS writing methods, refer to the following manual. ➠...
Page 994: Setting Communication Interface (Controller Setting)
19.6.2 Setting communication interface (Controller Setting) Make the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit interface setting on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT Designer 3. For the communication interface driver, set the same communication driver as the serial multi-drop connection. For details on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT Designer3, refer to the manuals. ➠...
Page 995 ■2. Setting the multi-drop system information function When checking the connection status of each GOT which is connected to GT01-RS4-M on the PLC side, set the multi- drop system information function. The GOT connection status is stored in the PLC side word device. (1) Setting on the PLC side word device Step 1.
Page 996 (3) Details on the word device assignment contents Control signal 1-1 Bit position Description bit0 10 second cycle flicker signal bit1 to 15 (Reserve) < 10 second cycle flicker signal > By the repetition of turning ON/OFF every 5 seconds, the connection between GT01-RS4-M and the PLC can be confirmed on the PLC side.
Page 997 ■3. Exporting/Importing the communication setting contents Export Step 1. After determining the storage location as necessary, name the file and save it. The file format is [*.ini] (fixed). Import Step 1. Enter the name of the file previously saved and open the file. The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).
Page 998 ■4. Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment. (1) For the connection with GOT Item Description Range 4800bps, 9600bps, Set this item when change the transmission speed used for Transmission Speed 19200bps, 38400bps, communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 115200bps) 57600bps, 115200bps Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs.
Page 999: Setting Switches
19.6.3 Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type. POINT POINT POINT Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit For details on the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit, refer to the following manual. ➠ Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit User’s Manual Terminating resistor PLC communication selector switch selection switch...
Page 1000: Precautions
19.7 Precautions ■1. Connecting GOT2000 in multi-drop connection (1) Installing standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit When connecting GOT2000 in multi-drop connection, the standard monitor OS and communication driver must be installed to the GOT from GT Designer3 (GOT1000) (Version 1.12N or later). The standard monitor OS or communication driver cannot be installed from GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
Page 1001 ■8. FA transparent function FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the GOT multi-drop connection system. (1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing Communication driver When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (GOT1000) (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
Page 1002 19 - 38 19.7 Precautions...
Page 1003 20. MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List ....... 20 - 2 20.2 System Configuration .
Page 1004: Connecting The Got To Plc Via Rs-232 Interface
20. MULTIPLE-GT21 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List For details of connectable models, refer to the following. ➠ 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU ➠ 7. SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONNECTION 20.2 System Configuration 20.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface Communication driver (1st) (2nd)

Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series Connection Manual

Introduction

Contents

1. Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring

1. Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring

Mitsubishi Electric Plc Connections

2. Device Range that Can be Set

3. Access Range for Monitoring

4. How to Monitor Reduntant System

6. Direct Connection to Cpu

7. Serial Communication Connection

8. Bus Connection

9. Melsecnet/H Connection (Plc to Plc Network)

10. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

18. Laser Displacement Sensor Mh11 Connection

14. Inverter Connection

Mitsubishi Electric Fa Device Connections

20. Multiple-Gt21 Connection Function

CC-Link Connection (Via G4)

FA Transparent Function

15. Servo Amplifier Connection

17. Cnc Connection

16. Robot Controller Connection

19. Got Multi-Drop Connection

Multiple Got Connections

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series